2010 wk jeep grand cherokee srt8

5/8/2018 2010 WK Jeep Grand Cherokee SRT8 - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2010-wk-jeep-grand-cherokee-srt8-559bf4d894a06 1/398

TABLE OF CONTENTSSECTION

1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Rollover Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Warnings And Cautions . .

Vehicle Identification Numbe

Vehicle Modifications/Altera



INTRODUCTIONCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler GroupLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precisionworkmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - allessentials that are traditional to our vehicles.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaintyou with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,located on the DVD, and various customer-orienteddocuments. Please take the time to read these publica-tions carefully. Following the instructions and recom-mendations in this manual will help assure safe and

enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be storedin the vehicle for convenient referencing and remainwith the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner willbe aware of all safety warnings.

When it comes to service, rememdealer knows your vehicle best,nicians and genuine Mopar parsatisfaction.

ROLLOVER WARNINGUtility vehicles have a significathan other types of vehicles. Tground clearance and a highemany passenger cars. It is capaba wide variety of off-road apunsafe manner, all vehicles can gof the higher center of gravitycontrol it may roll over when snot.

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrunsafe driving actions that ca

4 INTRODUCTION



control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may resultin an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatalinjury. Drive carefully.

Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts providedis a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.government notes that the universal use of existing seat

belts could cut the highway deaeach year and could reduce dmillion annually. In a rollover cis significantly more likely to da seat belt. Always buckle up.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUALConsult the Table of Contents tocontains the information you de

Since the specification of youritems of equipment ordered, illustrations may differ from yo

The detailed index at the back contains a complete listing of al

Consult the following table fsymbols that may be used on yothis Owner’s Manual:

Rollover Warning Label



6 INTRODUCTION



WARNINGS AND CAUTIONSThis Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you

do not read this entire manual, you may miss importantinformation. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERThe Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on alabel located on the left front corner of the instrumentpanel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through thewindshield. This number also appears on the AutomobileInformation Disclosure Label affixed to a window onyour vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record ofyour vehicle identification number and optional equip-ment.

NOTE: It is illegal to remove o

VIN Locat



VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle couldseriously affect its roadworthiness and safety andmay lead to an accident resulting in serious injury ordeath.

8 INTRODUCTION



THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOU

CONTENTS

A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 12

▫ Integrated Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Vehicle Security Alarm . . .

▫ Rearming The System . .

▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . .

▫ To Disarm The System .

Illuminated Entry . . . . . .

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

▫ To Unlock The Doors . .

▫ To Lock The Doors . . . .

▫ To Release The Liftgate Flip



▫ Remote Open Window Feature —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . 22

▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22


Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . 24

▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

▫Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

▫ Power Windows . . . . . .

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . .

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Liftgate Flipper Glass . .

Occupant Restraints . . . . .

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . .

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operati

▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder

▫ Energy Management Featu

▫ Automatic Locking Mode —

▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners — I

▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Re(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . .

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE



▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . 43

▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . 44

▫ Advanced Front Airbag Features . . . . . . . . . 46

▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . 50

▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . 70

Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Transporting Passengers

▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . .

▫ Safety Checks You Should Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Periodic Safety Checks YouOutside The Vehicle . . . .

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STA



A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYSYour vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This systemconsists of a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitterwith integrated ignition key and a Wireless IgnitionNode (WIN) with integral ignition switch. You can insert

the double-sided key into the ignition switch with eitherside up.

Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to anignition switch. It has four operating positions, three ofwhich are detented and one spring-loaded. The detentedpositions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START positionis a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When

released from the START position, the switch automati-cally returns to the detented ON position.

Wireless Ignition N

1 — LOCK2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)3 — ON4 — START




Integrated Ignition KeyThe integrated ignition key operates the ignition switch.It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-mitter and an emergency key, which stores in the rear ofthe RKE transmitter.

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicleshould the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmittergo dead. The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You can keep the emergency key with you whenvalet parking.

NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key withthe theft alarm armed, will results in the alarm sounding.

Insert the Fob (even if the Fob battery is dead) into theWIN to disarm theft alarm.

To remove the emergency key from the RKE transmitter,slide the mechanical latch at the top of the RKE transmit-ter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key outwith your other hand.

NOTE:You can insert the douinto the lock cylinders with eith

Ignition Key RemovalPlace the shift lever in PARK. TuLOCK position, and remove the

Remote Keyless Entry (R




NOTE:• If you try to remove the key before you place the shift

lever in PARK, it may become trapped temporarily inthe ignition switch. If this occurs, rotate the key to theright slightly, then remove the key as described. If a

malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in theignition switch to warn you that this safety feature isinoperable. The engine can be started and stopped, butthe key cannot be removed until you obtain service.

• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC), the power windowswitches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), andpower outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes

after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi-tion. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.The time for this feature is programmable. For details,refer to “Key Off Power Delay,” under “Personal

Settings (Customer-Program“Electronic Vehicle InformaSection 4 of this manual.

WARNIN

Never leave children alone unattended children in a vehnumber of reasons. A child oously or fatally injured. Do nignition. A child could opeother controls, or move the ve

CAUTIOAn unlocked car is an invitatremove key from the ignitiwhen leaving the vehicle una




Key-In-Ignition ReminderIf you open the driver’s door with the integrated ignitionkey in the ignition, a chime will sound to remind you toremove the key.

NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only soundswhen the integrated ignition key is placed in the LOCKor ACC position.

SENTRY KEYThe Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unautho-rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. Thesystem does not need to be armed or activated. Operationis automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked

or unlocked.The system uses the factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter with integrated key and Wireless Igni-tion Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera-tion. Therefore, only RKE transmitters that are pro-grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate

the vehicle. The system will shseconds if an invalid RKE transmengine.

After turning the ignition switchVehicle Security Light will turn bulb check. If the light remains indicates that there is a problemaddition, if the light begins to flit indicates that someone used anto start the engine. Either of thesthe engine being shut off after t

If the Vehicle Security Light tvehicle operation (vehicle runnionds), it indicates that there is Should this occur, have the vehpossible by an authorized deale




NOTE: The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is notcompatible with aftermarket remote starting systems.Use of these systems may result in vehicle startingproblems and loss of security protection.

All of the RKE transmitters provided with your new

vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only RKE transmitters that are programmed tothe vehicle electronics can be used to start and operatethe vehicle. Once an RKE transmitter is programmed to avehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock alldoors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

At the time of purchase, the oriwith a four-digit Personal IdenKeep the PIN in a secure lorequired for authorized dealer rmitters. Duplication of RKE tr

formed at an authorized dealer, programming a blank transmittics. A blank transmitter is onprogrammed.

NOTE: When having the Sesystem serviced, bring all vehicyou to the authorized dealer.

Customer Key ProgrammingProgramming of RKE transmittan authorized dealer.




General InformationThe Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference that may bereceived, including interference that may cause undes-ired operation.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARMThis Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,liftgate, liftgate flipper glass, and ignition for unautho-rized operation. When the alarm is activated, the Vehicle

Security Alarm provides both audio and visual signals.The horn will sound, the headlights, park lamps and/orturn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes. Ifdisturbance is still present (driver’s door, passenger door,other doors, ignition) after three minutes, the headlights,

park lamps and/or turn signaltional 15 minutes.

NOTE: The Panic and Securityent. Please take a moment to acSecurity modes to hear the differ

one should go off in the futurewhich mode has been activated

Rearming The SystemIf something triggers the alarm,disarm it, the Vehicle Securityhorn after three minutes, turn oafter 15 minutes, and then the Verearm itself.

To Set the AlarmThe alarm will set when you Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock when you use the power door lois open. After all the doors are




Vehicle Security Light (located in the instrument cluster)will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that theVehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this 16 secondarming period, opening any door or the liftgate willcancel the arming. If the Vehicle Security Alarm success-

fully arms, the Vehicle Security Light will flash at aslower rate to indicate the alarm is set.

To Disarm the SystemTo disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm, you will need topress the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter orturn the ignition key to the ON position. If something hastriggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence, thehorn will sound three times when you unlock the doors.

Check the vehicle for tampering.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect yourvehicle; however, you can create conditions where theVehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If youremain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE

transmitter, once the Vehicle S(after 16 seconds), when you puthe alarm will sound. If this occ button on the RKE transmitteSecurity Alarm. You may also

Vehicle Security Alarm by unlwith the key and then locking it but the Vehicle Security Alarm

ILLUMINATED ENTRYThe interior lights come on wheuse the Remote Keyless Entry lock any door. They will rema30 seconds after all doors are cl

The lights also will fade to off ifafter you close all the doors.




REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors andliftgate, or activate the panic alarm, from distances up toapproximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter

does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate thesystem.

NOTE: Inserting the RKE transmitter into the ignitionswitch disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter;however, the buttons on the remaining RKE transmitterswill continue to work. Driving the vehicle over 5 mphdisables all RKE transmitter buttons, for all RKE trans-mitters, until the ignition is turned back to OFF/LOCK.

To Unlock the DoorsPress and release the UNLOCtransmitter once to unlock the unlock all doors. The turn sigacknowledge the unlock signasystem will also turn on.

Three-Button RKE




Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors FirstPressThis feature lets you program the system to unlock eitherthe driver’s door or all doors, on the first press of theUNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the

current setting, proceed as follows:• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote KeyUnlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in the “Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC),” in Section 4 of thismanual.

Flash Lamps with Remote Key LockThis feature will cause the turn signal lamps to flashwhen the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKEtransmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. Tochange the current setting, proceed as follows:

• For vehicles equipped withInformation Center (EVIC), reLock,” under “PersonalProgrammable Features)” inInformation Center (EVIC),

manual.Turn Headlights On with ReThis feature activates the headliwhen the doors are unlocked wThe time for this feature is proequipped with the Electronic Ve(EVIC). For details, refer to “Hea“Personal Settings (Customer-P

in the “Electronic Vehicle InformSection 4 of this manual.




To Lock the DoorsPress and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash andthe horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doorsare locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can beturned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed asfollows:

• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC), refer to “Sound Horn withLock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in the “Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC),” in Section 4 of thismanual.

To Release the Liftgate FlippPress the FLIPPER GLASS/LIFTtwo times (the second press wfirst press) to open liftgate flipp

WARNINDriving with the flipper glassonous exhaust gases into youpassengers could be injuredthe flipper glass closed whenvehicle.

Remote Open Window Featu

This feature allows you to remotwindows at the same time. To urelease the UNLOCK button onthen immediately press and hountil the windows lower to the llower completely.




Using the Panic AlarmTo turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and holdthe PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least onesecond and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, theheadlights and park lamps will flash, the horn will pulse

on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unlessyou turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button asecond time, or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph(24 km/h) or greater.

NOTE:• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition

switch to the ACC or ON position while the PanicAlarm is activated. However, the exterior lamps andhorn will remain on.

Programming Additional TraIf you do not have a progracontact your authorized dealer

Transmitter Battery ServiceThe recommended replacemen

battery.

NOTE:• Perchlorate Material — spec

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard

• Do not touch the battery termhousing or the printed circui

1. Battery access is through a dthe fob. Insert a small, flat bladeand gently pry open the access




2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching thenew battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it withrubbing alcohol.

3. Reposition the access door opening and snap into place.

General InformationThis device complies with partRSS 210 of Industry Canada. O

following conditions:

• This device may not cause ha

• This device must accept anincluding interference thatoperation.

NOTE: Changes or modificaproved by the party responsibvoid the user’s authority to ope

If your RKE transmitter fails todistance, check for these two co

Battery Replacement

1— Battery Access Door




1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expectedlife of the battery is a minimum of three years.

2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio stationtower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPEDThis system uses the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-niently from outside the vehicle while stillmaintaining security. The system has a range of

approximately 328 ft (100 m).

NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.

How to Use Remote StartAll of the following conditionsengine will remote start:

• Shift lever in PARK

•

Doors closed• Hood closed

• Liftgate closed

• Hazard switch off

• Brake switch inactive (brake

• Ignition key removed from ig

• Battery at an acceptable char

• RKE PANIC button not press




WARNING!

• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage orconfined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-

bon monoxide is poisonous and can cause seriousinjury or death when inhaled.

• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmittersaway from children. Operation of the Remote StartSystem, windows, door locks or other controlscould cause serious injury or death.

To Enter Remote Start ModePress and release the REMOTE START buttonon the RKE transmitter twice, within five sec-onds. The parking lights will flash and the hornwill chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the

engine will start and the vehicle will remain in theRemote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.

NOTE:• If an engine fault is present t

then shut down 10 seconds l

• The park lamps will turn onRemote Start mode.

• For security, power windoweration (if equipped) are disain the Remote Start mode.

• The engine can be started tw15 minute cycles) with the RKthe ignition switch must be c before you can repeat the st

cycle.To Exit Remote Start Mode WVehiclePress and release the REMOTE Sallow the engine to run for the




NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the systemwill disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid RemoteStart request.

To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle

Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release theUNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock thedoors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (ifequipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switchto the ON position.

• The ignition switch must be in the ON position inorder to drive the vehicle.

• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/Turn To Run” will flash in the EVIC until you insertthe key. Once inserted, the message “Turn To Run”will flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to run.

DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door LocksUse the manual door lock plunginside the vehicle. If the plungeis closed, the door will lock. The

is not inside the vehicle before c

WARNIN

• For personal security and saccident, lock the vehicle dowell as when you park and

• When leaving the vehicle, from the ignition and lockleave unattended childrenaccess to an unlocked vehicvehicle equipment may caujuries and death.




Power Door LocksThe power door lock switch is located on each front doorpanel. Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors.

If the plunger is down when the door is closed, the doorwill lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not inside thevehicle before closing the door.

If you press the door lock switchignition switch and the driver’swill not lock.

The rear doors cannot be openeuntil you pull up the lock plun

Automatic Unlock On Exit FeIf Auto Unlock is enabled, this fdoors when the driver’s door isstopped and in PARK or NEUUnlock on Exit” under the “Eletion Center (EVIC),” in sectionyour authorized dealer.

Automatic Door LocksIf this feature is selected, youautomatically when the vehicle(24 km/h) and all doors are closa door is opened.

Power Door Lock Switch




This feature is selectable and can be turned on or off.Refer to “Auto Door Locks” under “Customer-Programmable Features” in the “Electronic Vehicle Infor-mation Center (EVIC),” in Section 4 of this manual, or seeyour authorized dealer.

Child Protection Door LockThe rear doors of your vehicle are equipped with ChildProtection Door Locks. If you push up on the lever on theopen edge of the door it cannot be opened from the insideof the vehicle. Push the lever down to disengage theChild Protection Door Locks.

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.Remember that the rear doors can only be openedfrom the outside when the Child Protection DoorLocks are engaged.

WINDOWS

Power WindowsThe power window controls ardoor trim panel. There is a sinpassenger door/rear doors w

Child Protection




passenger/rear passenger door windows. The windowcontrols will operate only when the ignition switch is inthe ON or ACCESSORY position.

The power window switches remain active for up to10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.

Auto-DownBoth the driver and front passhave an “Auto-Down” feature. past the first detent, release, adown automatically. To cancel ment, operate the switch in direction and release the switch

To open the window part way,and release it when you want th

The power window switches rutes after the ignition has beeeither front door will cancel thi

Auto Up Feature with Anti-PDriver and Front Passenger DLift the window switch to the sethe window will go up automat

Power Window Switches




To stop the window from going all the way up during theAuto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.

To close the window part way, lift the window switch tothe first detent and release when you want the window tostop.

NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle duringAuto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down.Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again toclose the window. Any impact due to rough road condi-tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedlyduring Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly tothe first detent and hold it to close the window manually.

WARNIN

There is no anti-pinch protecis almost closed. Be sure to clwindow before closing.

Resetting the Auto Up FeaturShould the Auto Up feature stoprobably needs to be reset. To r

Pull the window switch up andpletely, then pull and hold the s




Window Lockout ButtonThe Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allowsyou to disable the window controls on the other doors. Todisable the window controls on the other doors, press theWindow Lockout button. To enable the window controls,press the Window Lockout button again.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be describpressure on the ears or a helicears. Your vehicle may exhibit windows down, or the sunroof

open or partially open positionsrence and can be minimized. If the sunroof open, adjust the sunthe buffeting.

Window Lockout Button





LIFTGATETo open the liftgate, pull up (squeeze) on the handle andlift. Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with theplunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock theliftgate.

WARNIN

• Driving with the liftgate oous exhaust gases into yourpassengers could be injuredthe liftgate closed when vehicle.

• The tailpipes may be hot aously injured if you come i

Liftgate Flipper GlassThe liftgate flipper glass is aliftgate is unlocked. To open thethe window switch located on t

Liftgate Release





WARNING!To avoid injury stand back when opening. Glass willautomatically rise.

Once the liftgate flipper glass htion to the rear window wiper iactivation of the rear wiper bladis open.

NOTE: If a malfunction to t

occur, an emergency liftgate latopen the liftgate. The emergency be accessed through a snap-iliftgate trim panel.

WARNIN

Driving with the flipper glassonous exhaust gases into you

passengers could be injuredthe flipper glass closed whenvehicle.

Liftgate Glass Release





OCCUPANT RESTRAINTSSome of the most important safety features in yourvehicle are the restraint systems:

• Front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passen-gers

• Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen-ger

• Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints(AHR) located on top of the front seats (integrated intothe head restraint)

• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)for the driver and passengers seated next to a window

— if equipped

• Supplemental Side Seat Airbags — if equipped

• An energy-absorbing steering column and steeringwheel

• Knee bolsters/blockers for fr

• Front seat belts incorporate poccupant protection by manduring an impact event — if

If you will be carrying children seat belts, the seat belts or the Lofor CHildren (LATCH) feature infant and child restraint system

NOTE: The Advanced Front Ainflator design. This allows therates of inflation based on sever

Please pay close attention to

section. It tells you how to usproperly, to keep you and youpossible.





WARNING!

In a collision, you and your passengers can suffermuch greater injuries if you are not properly buckledup. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or otherpassengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.Always be sure you and others in your vehicle arebuckled up properly.

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, evenon short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driverand cause a collision that includes you. This can happenfar away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat bcan reduce the seriousness of injof the worst injuries happen wfrom the vehicle. Seat belts rejection and the risk of injuryinside of the vehicle. Everyone ibe belted at all times.

Lap/Shoulder BeltsAll seating positions in your vlap/shoulder belts. The belt wsigned to lock during very sudThis feature allows the shouldefreely with you under normal c

sion, the belt will lock and reducthe inside of the vehicle or bein





WARNING!

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seatbelts are designed to go around the large bones ofyour body. These are the strongest parts of yourbody and can take the forces of a collision the best.Wearing your belt in the wrong place could makeyour injuries in a collision much worse. You mightsuffer internal injuries, or you could even slide outof part of the belt. Follow these instructions to

wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-sengers safe, too.

(Continued)

WARNING! (C

• Two people should never seat belt. People belted togeanother in an accident, hurNever use a lap/shoulder be

than one person, no matter

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating

1. Enter the vehicle and closeadjust the seat.





2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latchplate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the beltgo around your lap.

3. When the belt is long enougplate into the buckle until you h

Latch Plate

Latch Plate to





WARNING!

• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle willnot protect you properly. The lap portion couldride too high on your body, possibly causinginternal injuries. Always buckle your belt into thebuckle nearest you.

• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seatbelt snugly.

(Continued)

WARNING! (C

• A belt that is worn under yous. Your body could strikthe vehicle in a collision, ininjury. A belt worn und

internal injuries. Ribs arenbones. Wear the belt overyour strongest bones wilcollision.

• A shoulder belt placed behyou from injury during a clikely to hit your head in awear your shoulder belt. Th

are meant to be used togeth





4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below yourabdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is tootight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in acollision.

WARNING!

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk ofinjury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at thestrong hip and pelvic bones, but across your ab-domen. Always wear the lap part of your seat beltas low as possible and keep it snug.

•

A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In acollision, it could even cut into you. Be sure thebelt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt inyour vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer andhave it fixed.

5. Position the shoulder belt oncomfortable and not resting on will withdraw any slack in the

6. To release the belt, push the ron the buckle. The belt will austowed position. If necessary, slthe webbing to allow it to retrac

Removing Slack





WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision andleave you with no protection. Inspect the belt systemperiodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Donot disassemble or modify the system. Seat beltassemblies must be replaced after an accident if theyhave been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,etc.).

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt AnchorageIn the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can beadjusted upward or downward to position the belt away

from your neck. Press the release button to release theanchorage, and then move it up or down to the positionthat serves you best.

As a guide, if you are shorter

prefer a lower position, and if yoyou will prefer a higher positioanchorage, try to move it up orit is locked in position.

Adjusting Upper S




Energy Management FeatureThis vehicle has a safety belt system with an EnergyManagement feature in the front seating positions to helpfurther reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-oncollision.

This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that isdesigned to release webbing in a controlled manner. Thisfeature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting onthe occupant’s chest.

WARNING!

• The belt and retractor assembly must be replacedif the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt func-tion is not working properly when checked ac-cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.

• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assemblycould increase the risk of injury in collisions.

Automatic Locking Mode —In this mode, the shoulder belocked. The belt will still retracthe shoulder belt.

When to Use the Automatic LUse the Automatic Locking Moseat is installed in the rear Children 12 years old and younrestrained in the rear seat when

How to Use the Automatic Lo

1. Buckle the combination lap a

2. Grasp the shoulder portion athe entire belt is fully extended

3. Allow the belt to retract. As hear a clicking sound. This indnow in the Automatic Locking




How to Disengage the Automatic Locking ModeDisconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allowit to retract completely to disengage the AutomaticLocking Mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive (Emer-gency) Locking mode.

Seat Belt Pretensioners — If EquippedThe driver and front passenger seat belts may beequipped with a pretensioning device that is designed toremove any slack from the seat belt systems in the eventof a collision. This device improves the performance ofthe seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around theoccupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for allsize occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt must still beworn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggerestraint Controller (ORC). Like thers are single use items. Afterairbags and/or pretensioners, apretensioner must be replaced i

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Rem(BeltAlert)If the driver’s seat belt has n60 seconds of starting the vehiclis greater than 5 mph (8 km/h),the driver to buckle the seat belinstruct all other occupants toOnce the warning is triggered,tinue to chime and flash the Sea96 seconds or until the driver’sBeltAlert will be reactivated iunbuckled for more than 10 sspeed is greater than 5 mph (8




BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorizeddealer or by following these steps:

NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ONor START position. Chrysler Group LLC does not recom-

mend deactivating BeltAlert.1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, and buckle the driver’s seat belt.

2. Turn the ignition key to the ACC/ON position (do notstart the engine), and wait for the Seat Belt ReminderLight to turn off.

3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle

and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least threetimes within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt buckled.

4. Turn the ignition key to thechime will sound to signify thacompleted the programming.

BeltAlert can be reactivated by

NOTE: Although BeltAlert h

Seat Belt Reminder Light willwhile the driver’s seat belt rem

Seat Belts and Pregnant WoWe recommend that pregnant wthroughout their pregnancy. Kethe best way to keep the baby s

Pregnant women should wear

across the thighs and as snug acKeep the belt low so that it doabdomen. That way the strong bthe force if there is a collision.




Seat Belt ExtenderIf a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended andwhen the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (ifequipped) is in its lowest position, your authorizeddealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. Thisextender should be used only if the existing belt is not

long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-tender and store it.

WARNING!

Using a seat belt extender when not needed canincrease the risk of injury in a collision. Only usewhen the lap belt is not long enough when it is wornlow and snug, and in the recommended seatingpositions. Remove and store the extender when notneeded.

Supplemental Restraint SysThis vehicle has airbags for bopassenger as a supplement tosystems. The driver’s front aicenter of the steering wheel. Theis mounted in the instrument

compartment. The words SRS Athe airbag covers.




NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federalregulations for Advanced Airbags.

The Advanced Front Airbags hdesign. This allows the airbag tinflation based on the severity a

This vehicle may also be equipSide Airbag Inflatable Curtain

driver, front, and rear passengdow. If the vehicle is equipped ware located above the side windalso labeled: SRS AIRBAG.

NOTE: Airbag covers may not trim; but they will open during

Airbag System ComponentsThe airbag system consists of th

• Occupant Restraint Controlle

• Airbag Warning Light

• Driver Front Airbag

1 — Driver Airbag2 — Passenger Airbag3 — Knee Bolster




• Front Passenger Airbag

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolster

• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners — if equipped

• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)— if equipped

Advanced Front Airbag FeaturesThe Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driverand front passenger airbags. This system provides outputappropriate to the severity and type of collision asdetermined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),which may receive information from the impact sensorsat the front of the car.

The first stage inflator is triggereimpact that requires airbag depthe second stage determines whlow, medium, or high. If a low outhe need, the remaining gas in t

WARNIN

• Do not put anything on or aor attempt to open them manthe airbags and you could airbags may no longer be fucovers for the airbag cushioonly when the airbags are in

• Do not drill, cut or tamper wany way.

• Do not mount any accessorsuch as alarm lights, stereoetc.




Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain(SABIC) — If EquippedSABIC airbags offer side-impact and vehicle rolloverprotection to front and rear seat outboard occupants inaddition to that provided by the body structure. Eachairbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the

head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potentialfor side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down-ward, covering both windows on the impact side.

NOTE:• Should a vehicle rollover

and/or SABIC airbags on bmay deploy.

Supplemental Side Airbag InflLocation




• Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim; but they will open during airbag deployment.

The system includes sensors adjacent to both front andrear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy theSABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occu-

pant protection.

WARNING!

• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right SideAirbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stackluggage or other cargo up high enough to blockthe location of the SABIC. The area where the sidecurtain airbag is located should remain free from

any obstructions.• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects

between you and the side airbags; the performancecould be adversely affected and/or objects couldbe pushed into you, causing serious injury.

Along with seat belts and pretenAirbags work with the knee bolsprotection for the driver and fronalso work with seat belts to imp

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters helpdriver and the front passenger, athe best interaction with the Ad

Here are some simple steps yourisk of harm from a deploying a

Children 12 years old and you buckled up in a rear seat.




WARNING!

Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVERride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passengerfront airbag. An airbag deployment can cause severeinjury or death to infants in that position.

Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should besecured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not usechild restraints or belt-positioning booster seats shouldride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allowchildren to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under

their arm.If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing childseat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seatas far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.(Refer to information on Child Restraints in this section.)

You should read the instructiochild restraint to make sure that

All occupants should ALWAYS wder belts properly.

The driver and front passenger

back as far as practical to allAirbags room to inflate.

Do not lean against the door. airbags, and deployment occuinflate forcefully into the spacdoor.

If the airbag system in this vehi

to accommodate a disabled persCenter. Phone numbers are provAssistance in Section 9 of this m




WARNING!

• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to moresevere injuries in a collision. The airbags workwith your seat belt to restrain you properly. Insome collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.

Always wear your seat belts even though you haveairbags.

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrumentpanel during front airbag deployment could causeserious injury, including death. Airbags needroom to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extendingyour arms to reach the steering wheel or instru-ment panel.

• Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not leanagainst the door. Sit upright in the center of theseat.

Airbag Deployment Sensors

Occupant Restraint ControlleThe ORC is part of a Federallyrequired for this vehicle.

The ORC determines if deploym

side airbags in a frontal or sidBased on the impact sensors sigORC deploys the Advanced Fr bags — if equipped, and front sif equipped, as required, dependof impact.

Advanced Front Airbags are detional protection by suppleme

certain frontal collisions depentype of collision. Advanced Frpected to reduce the risk of injurcollisions.

Th Ad d F Ai b ill d l i ll f l Th ORC i h di




The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontalcollisions, including some that may produce substantialvehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the otherhand, depending on the type and location of impact,Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with

little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severeinitial deceleration.

The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Sideairbag deployment will depend on the severity and typeof collision.

Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration overtime, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not

good indicators of whether or not an airbag should havedeployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,away from an inflating airbag.

The ORC monitors the readinessthe system whenever the ignitioor ON position. If the key is in tACC position, or not in the ignon and will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup pomay deploy the airbags even if tit becomes disconnected prior t

Also, the ORC turns Light in the instrummately six to eight swhen the ignition is f

self-check, the Airbag Warning

ORC detects a malfunction in aturns on the Airbag Warning Lor continuously. A single chimcomes on again after initial star

It l i l d di ti th t ill ill i t th i t th Ad d F t Ai b D




It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction isnoted. The diagnostics also record the nature of themalfunction.

WARNING!

Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru-ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags toprotect you in a collision. If the light does not comeon, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comeson as you drive, have the airbag system checked rightaway.

Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units

The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units arelocated in the center of the steering wheel and the rightside of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects acollision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units.A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate

the Advanced Front Airbags. Drates are possible, based on the ity. The steering wheel hub trright side of the instrument panof the way as the bags inflate tofully inflate in about 50 to 70 m

half of the time it takes to blink quickly deflate while helping tfront passenger.

The driver front airbag gas is vholes in the sides of the airbairbag gas is vented through thethe airbag. In this way, the airbyour control of the vehicle.

Supplemental Side Airbag In(SABIC) Inflator Units — If EDuring collisions where the iparticular area of the side of th

d l th SABIC Ai b d di it d F t d Sid I t S




deploy the SABIC Airbags, depending on severity andtype of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy theSABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.

A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the sidecurtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushesthe outside edge of the headliner out of the way andcovers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 ms(about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink youreyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not beltedand seated properly, or if items are positioned in the areawhere the side curtain airbag inflates. This especiallyapplies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.

Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time,vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators ofwhether or not an airbag should have deployed.

NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SABICairbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.

Front and Side Impact SensoIn front and side impacts, impacdetermining appropriate responditional sensors in the ORC detedeployment and provide verific

Enhanced Accident ResponseIn the event of an impact causinthe communication network rpower remains intact, dependevent the ORC will determinEnhanced Accident Response following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long asuntil the ignition key is turne

• Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as floor The are not caused b




• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long asthe battery has power or until the ignition key isremoved.

• Unlock the doors automatically.

If a Deployment Occurs

The airbags are designed to deflate immediately afterdeployment.

NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in allcollisions. This does not mean something is wrong withthe airbag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, anyor all of the following may occur:

• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and frontpassenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. Theabrasions are similar to friction rope burns or thoseyou might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium

floor. They are not caused byThey are not permanent andHowever, if you haven’t heafew days, or if you have any bimmediately.

• As the airbags deflate, you mparticles. The particles are a nprocess that generates the airbag inflation. These airborthe skin, eyes, nose, or throairritation, rinse the area withthroat irritation, move to frcontinues, see your doctor. Iyour clothing, follow the gar

structions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle aftployed. If you are involved iairbags will not be in place to p

Maintaining Your Airbag Sys




WARNING!

Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannotprotect you in another collision. Have the airbags,seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seatbelt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized

dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the OccupantRestraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.

Maintaining Your Airbag Sys

WARNIN

• Modifications to any partcould cause it to fail when

be injured if the airbag sprotect you. Do not modiwiring, including adding stickers to the steering wheupper right side of the insmodify the front bumper, vor add aftermarket side ste

• It is dangerous to try to rairbag system yourself. Be

works on your vehicle that

Airbag Warning Light




WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad-vanced airbag system. The airbag may inflateaccidentally or may not function properly if modi-fications are made. Take your vehicle to an autho-

rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser-vice. If your seat, including your trim cover andcushion, needs to be serviced in any way (includ-ing removal or loosening/tightening of seat attach-ment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorizeddealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify anadvanced airbag system for persons with disabili-ties, contact your authorized dealer.

Airbag Warning LightYou will want to hainflate for your protecthe airbag system is nance free, if any of th

an authorized dealer service the

• The Airbag Warning Light approximately six to eight seswitch is first turned ON.

• The light remains on after eight-second interval.

• The light comes on and rema

NOTE: If the speedometer tachometer or any engine NOTE:




NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any enginerelated gauges are not working, the Occupant RestraintController (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags maynot be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptlycheck the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the labellocated on the inside of the fuse block cover for the

proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if thefuse is good.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed torecord up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-eters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to themoment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (ifapplicable), and up to a quarter second of either high-

speed deceleration data or change in velocity duringand/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment.EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, ornearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.

NOTE:1. A near-deployment event osensor detects severe vehicle dective of a crash, but not severe edeployment.

2. Under certain circumstancerecorded (e.g., loss of battery po

In conjunction with other data plete accident investigation, thused by Chrysler Group LLC aabout the possible causes of injuries in order to assess and mance. In addition to crash in

Chrysler Group LLC, such inquested by customers, insuranofficials, and professional crash associated with universities, andance organizations.

In the event that an investigation is undertaken by 1 Used for research purposes




In the event that an investigation is undertaken byChrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the com-pany or its designated representative will first obtainpermission of the appropriate custodial entity for thevehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) beforeaccessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to

download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will beprovided to the custodial entity upon request. Generaldata that does not identify particular vehicles or crashesmay be released for incorporation in aggregate crashdatabases, such as those maintained by the U.S. govern-ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitivenature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-

hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidentialdata will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to anythird party except when:

1. Used for research purposeswith a particular crash record iprovided confidentiality of pepreserved.

2. Used in defense of litigatioGroup LLC product.

3. Requested by police under a

4. Otherwise required by law.

Data parameters that are record

• Diagnostic trouble code(s) anelectronically-controlled safeairbag system

• Vehicle speed

• Engine RPM

• Brake switch status

• Pedal position seat Owner’s Manual to ensure




Pedal position

• And other parameters depending on vehicleconfiguration

Child RestraintsEveryone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the

time, including babies and children. Every state in theUnited States, and all Canadian provinces, require thatsmall children ride in proper restraint systems. This is thelaw, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crashstatistics, children are safer when properly restrained inthe rear seats rather than in the front.

There are different sizes and types of restraints forchildren from newborn size to the child almost largeenough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child

seat Owner s Manual to ensurefor your child. Use the restrainchild.

WARNIN

In a collision, an unrestrained can become a projectile insidrequired to hold even an inbecome so great that you coulmatter how strong you are. could be badly injured. Anyvehicle should be in a proper size.

Infants and Child RestraintsWARNIN




a ts a d C d est a ts

• Safety experts recommend that children riderearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at leastone year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two typesof child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infantcarriers and convertible child seats.

• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in thevehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh upto about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats oftenhave a higher weight limit in the rearward-facingdirection than infant carriers do, so they can be usedrearward-facing by children who weigh more than20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types

of child restraints are held in the vehicle by thelap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint an-chorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child Seat An-chorage System in this section.)

WARNIN

• Rearward-facing child seatin the front seat of a vehicleger airbag unless the airbairbag deployment could

death to infants in this pos• Improper installation can

infant or child restraint. Itcollision. The child couldkilled. Follow the manufaactly when installing an in

• A rearward-facing infant reused in a rear seat. A rear

straint in the front seat maying passenger airbag whicfatal injury to the infant.

Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child designed to keep the lap porti




p g g yrestraint:

• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that ithas a label certifying that it meets all applicable SafetyStandards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends thatyou try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where youwill use it before you buy it.

• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’sweight and height. Check the label on the restraint forweight and height limits.

• Carefully follow the instructions that come with therestraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it maynot work when you need it.

• Except for the second row center seating position, allpassenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latchplates. The second row center position has an auto-matic locking retractor. Both types of seat belts are

g p p prestraint so that it is not necesIf the seat belt has a cinching the shoulder portion of thetighten the belt (the cinching belt tight; however, any sea

with time, so check the belt tight if necessary). For the secwith the automatic locking rethe retractor until there is enothrough the child restraint ainto the buckle. Then, pull extended from the retractor.into the retractor, pulling o

tighten the lap portion arounadditional information, refeMode earlier in this section.

• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the Do not leave it loose in the ve




, y y g glap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt pathopening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch platefrom the buckle and twist the short buckle-end beltseveral times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into

the buckle with the release button facing out.• If the belt still cannot be tightened, or if pulling and

pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnectthe latch plate from the buckle, turn the bucklearound, and insert the latch plate into the buckleagain. If you still cannot make the child restraintsecure, try a different seating position.

• Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as themanufacturer’s instructions tell you.

• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in thevehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.

collision, it could strike the occause serious personal injury

NOTE: For additional www.seatcheck.org or callCanadian residents, should ref

website for additional informatroadsafety/safedrivers/childsaf

Older Children and Child ReChildren who weigh more than older than one year, can ridvehicle. Forward-facing child seseats used in the forward-facingwho weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18than one year. These child sevehicle by the lap/shoulder brestraint anchorage system (ReSeat Anchorage System in this s

The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing • Check belt fit periodically.




p g g gmore than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fitthe vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sitwith knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while thechild’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-

positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by thelap/shoulder belt.

Children Too Large for Booster SeatsChildren who are large enough to wear the shoulder beltcomfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bendover the front of the seat when their back is against theseatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.

• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.

• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snugas possible.

p yslouching can move the belt

• If the shoulder belt contacts tchild closer to the center of thchild to put the shoulder beltthe back.

LATCH — Child Seat AnchoAnchors and Tether for CHilYour vehicle’s rear seat is eqrestraint anchorage system callsystem provides for the installawithout using the vehicle’s seathe child restraint using lowertether straps from the child structure.

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail- All three rear seating positions




able. However, because the lower anchorages are to beintroduced over a period of years, child restraint systemshaving attachments for those anchorages will continue toalso have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for

connection to the top tether anchorages, have beenavailable for some time. For some older child restraints,many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tetherstrap kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantageof all the available attachments provided with your childrestraint in any vehicle.

NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system toinstall a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts

not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and outof reach of children. Remind all children in the vehiclethat the seat belts are not toys and should not be playedwith, and never leave your child unattended in thevehicle.

that are capable of accommodachild seats having flexible, webtachments. Child seats with fmust be installed in the outboarless of the specific type of low

install LATCH-compatible childshare a common lower anchora

If you are installing LATCH-coin adjacent rear seating posiLATCH anchors or the vehicle’s position, but you must use thecenter position. If your child recompatible, you can only install

the vehicle’s seat belts. For typtions, refer to “Installing the LARestraint System”.

Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint




SystemWe urge you to carefully follow the directions of themanufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not allchild restraint systems will be installed as described here.Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that

were provided with the child restraint system.The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located atthe rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback,and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat toinstall the child restraint. You will easily feel them if yourun your finger along the intersection of the seatback andseat cushion surfaces.

Latch Ancho

In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each means of adjusting the tension




rear seating position located on the back of the seat.

Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped withseparate straps on each side, with each having a hook orconnector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a

facing toddler restraints and restraints will also be equippehook for attachment to the tethmeans of adjusting the tension

First, loosen the adjusters on the

tether strap so that you can moror connectors to the vehicle anclower hooks or connectors over bars, pushing aside the seat covthe tether anchorage directly beare placing the child restraint anto the anchorage, being careful tprovide the most direct path bet

child restraint. Finally, tightenpush the child restraint rearwardseat, removing slack in the straprestraint manufacturer’s instruc

Tether Strap Mounting

WARNING!For seat belts having an Auto(ALR) ll h b l f h




WARNING!

Improper installation of a child restraint to theLATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant orchild restraint. The child could be badly injured orkilled. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly

when installing an infant or child restraint.

Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle SeatBeltsThe passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch-ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which aredesigned to keep the lap portion tight around the childrestraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. Ifthe seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on theshoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight;however, any seat belt system will loosen with time, socheck the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.

(ALR), pull the belt from theenough allowance to pass it thand slide the latch plate into th belt until it is fully extended fro belt to return into the retracto

webbing to tighten the lap prestraint. Refer to “Automatic Lthis section.

In the rear seat, you may havelap/shoulder belt on the chil buckle or latch plate is too closeon the restraint. Disconnect t buckle and twist the short buck

to shorten it. Insert the latch platrelease button facing out.

If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling andhi th t i t l th b lt d

WARNIN




pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may needto do something more. Disconnect the latch plate fromthe buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latchplate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make thechild restraint secure, try a different seating position.

To attach a child restraint tether strap:

Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach thehook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.For the outboard seating positions, route the tether overthe head rests, and attach the hook to the tether anchorlocated on the back of the seat.

N N

Always remove the subwoowhenever the tether anchors are required for proper inststraining device. In the event o

severe vehicle maneuvers, lunsecured in the vehicle coufatal injury to anyone in the v

WARNIN




An incorrectly anchored tethincreased head motion and child. Use only the anchor pothe child seat to secure a chi

strap.

Transporting PetsAirbags deploying in the front sAn unrestrained pet will be thrinjured, or injure a passenger dua collision. Pets should be restrpet harnesses or pet carriers that

Tether Strap Mounting

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONSA long break in period is not required for the engine in

A new engine may consume somthousand miles (kilometers) of o




A long break-in period is not required for the engine inyour vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within thelimits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-mental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is ahigh-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oilchanges should be consistent with anticipated climate

conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.The recommended viscosity and quality grades areshown in “Engine Oil”, under “Maintenance Procedures”in section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT ORSTRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.

thousand miles (kilometers) of oconsidered a normal part of thpreted as an indication of diffic

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting PassengersNEVER TRANSPORT PASSENAREA.

WARNIN

• It is extremely dangerous inside or outside of a vehiclriding in these areas are m

ously injured or killed.

WARNING! (Continued)Do not run the engine in a closareas any longer than needed to




• Do not allow people to ride in any area of yourvehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a seat belt properly.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbonmonoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.Breathing it can make you unconscious and can

eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)follow these safety tips:

areas any longer than needed toout of the area.

If it is necessary to sit in a parkerunning, adjust your heating oroutside air into the vehicle. Set t

If you are required to drive withmake sure that all windows arcontrol BLOWER switch is set use the recirculation mode.

The best protection against carbthe vehicle body is a properly msystem.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaustsystem when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the

Front seat belt assemblies mcollision Rear seat belt assembli




system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside thevehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle isdamaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open

seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumesto seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raisedfor lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside theVehicle

Seat BeltsInspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replacedimmediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

collision. Rear seat belt assemblia collision if they have been damtorn webbing, etc.). If there is anor retractor condition, replace th

Airbag Warning Light

The light should come on and rseconds as a bulb check when tturned ON. If the light is not lit authorized dealer. If the light ston while driving, have the systerized dealer.

DefrosterCheck operation by selecting thethe blower control on high speefeel the air directed against thauthorized dealer for serviceinoperable.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outsidethe Vehicle

Door LatchesCheck for positive closing latch




the Vehicle

TiresExamine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wearpatterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objectslodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for

cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.

LightsHave someone observe the operation of exterior lightswhile you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

Check for positive closing, latch

Fluid LeaksCheck area under vehicle after oengine coolant, oil, or other fluifumes are detected or if fuel, p

brake fluid leaks are suspectelocated and corrected immediat



UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOU



CONTENTS

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . 81

▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

▫ Power Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 82

▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . 82

uconnect™ phone — If Equip Voice Recognition (VR) Syste

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Front Manual Seat Adjustm

▫ Front Seat Adjustment — R

▫ Manual Lumbar Support A

▫ Eight-Way Driver’s Power

▫ Four-Way Passenger’s PowIf Equipped . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

F t H t d S t If E i d 87

▫ Multifunction Lever . . .

H dli ht A d P ki Li

76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE



▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 87

▫ Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 89

▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 94▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking

Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter ToMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

▫ To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked ToMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

▫ Headlights And Parking Li

▫ Automatic Headlight SysteIf Equipped . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Headlights On Automatica

▫ Smartbeam™ — If Equippe

▫ Daytime Running Lights —

▫ Automatic Headlight LeveHeadlights Only . . . . . . .

▫ Instrument Panel And Inte

▫ Battery Saver Feature . .

▫ Lights-On Reminder . . .

▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped

▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . .

▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

▫ Hi h/L B S it h 106

Adjustable Pedals — If Equip

El t i S d C t l I

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATUR



▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . 109

▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 109

▫ Windshield Washer Operation . . . . . . . . . . 110

▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . 112

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . 113

Electronic Speed Control — I

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . .

▫ To Set a Desired Speed .

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . .

▫ To Resume Speed . . . . .

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting

▫ To Accelerate For Passing

Rear Park Assist — If Equipp

▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors

▫ Rear Park Assist Warning D

▫ Enable/Disable The Rear P

▫ Service The Rear Park Assi

▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . 122

▫ System Usage Precautions 122

▫ Reprogramming A Single HButton . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




▫ System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Rear Camera — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

▫ Turning The Rear Camera On Or Off —With Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

▫ Turning The Rear Camera On Or Off —Without Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . 128

▫ Programming HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . 132

▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . .

▫ General Information . . .

Power Sunroof — If Equippe

▫ Opening Sunroof — Expre

▫ Closing Sunroof — Express

▫ Pinch Protect Feature . .

▫ Pinch Protect Override .

▫Venting Sunroof — Express

▫ Sunshade Operation . . .

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . .

▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

▫ Ignition Off Operation 137

▫ Rear Storage Compartment

▫ Retractable Cargo Area Co




▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

▫ Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

▫ Retractable Cargo Area CoIf Equipped . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks .

▫ Cargo Load Floor . . . . .

Rear Window Features . . .

▫ Rear Window Wiper/Wash

▫ Rear Window Defroster .

MIRRORS

Automatic Dimming Mirror




Automatic Dimming MirrorThis mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glarefrom vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on oroff by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A lightnext to the button will illuminate to indicate when the

dimming feature is activated.

CAUTIO

To avoid damage to the mirrorspray any cleaning solution dApply the solution onto a clemirror clean.

Automatic Dimm

Outside MirrorsTo receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors

Outside Automatic DimmingEquipped




to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slightoverlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger-sideconvex mirror will look smaller and farther awaythan they really are. Relying too much on yourpassenger-side mirror could cause you to collide withanother vehicle or other objects. Use your insidemirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicleseen in the passenger-side mirror.

Outside Mirrors Folding FeatureAll outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved eitherforward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges havethree detent positions; full forward, full rearward andnormal.

The driver and passenger outsidcally adjust for glare from vefeature is controlled by the insmirror and can be turned on or oat the base of the inside mirrormatically adjust for headlightmirror adjusts.

Power Outside MirrorsThe power mirror switch is lodoor trim panel next to the porotary knob selects the left miposition.

After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the samedirection you want the mirror to move. Use the off

Heated Mirrors — If EquippeThese mirrors are heated




(center) position to guard against accidentally moving amirror position.

feature is activated whenwindow defroster. Refer to “Rethis section, for further informa

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors —

To access an illuminated vanitythe sun visors.

Lift the cover to reveal the mirrautomatically.

Power Mirror Switch

VOICE RECOGNITION (VR) SEQUIPPEDR f “V i R i i (VR




uconnect™ phone — IF EQUIPPED

Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in the uconnect™ UserManual located on the DVD for further details.

Refer to “Voice Recognition (VRManual located on the DVD for

SEATSSeats are a primary part of the O

of the vehicle. They need to beoperation of the vehicle.

WARNIN

• DO NOT allow people to rvehicle that is not equippbelts. In a collision, peoplare more likely to be seriou

• Be sure everyone in your vusing a seat belt properly.

Lighted Vanity Mirror

Front Manual Seat AdjustmentMove the seat forward or rearward using the adjustmentb Lift th b l t d th f t f th t

Front Seat Adjustment — ReTo adjust the seatback, lift th

tb d id f th t l b




bar. Lift up on the bar located on the front of the seat nearthe floor. Using body pressure, move forward and rear-ward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters havelatched.

WARNING!

Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving isdangerous. The sudden movement of the seat couldcause you to lose control. The seat belt might not beproperly adjusted, and you could be injured. Adjustany seat only while the vehicle is parked.

outboard side of the seat, lean bat the desired position. To retulever, lean forward and release

WARNIN

Do not ride with the seatback belt is no longer resting agcollision, you could slide undseriously or even fatally injonly when the vehicle is park

Manual Lumbar Support AdjustmentThe manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located

th i ht id f th d i ’ tb k ( ll d l ) d

Eight-Way Driver’s Power SeThe driver’s power seat switc

tb d id f th d i ’




on the right side of the driver’s seatback (all models) andon the left side of the passenger’s seatback (if equipped).Moving the lumbar control lever forward and rearwardwill increase or decrease the lumbar support.

outboard side of the driver’s scontrols up/down, forward/rement. The top switch controls thment.

Manual Lumbar Control Power Seat Sw

WARNING!

Adj ti t hil th hi l i i i

NOTE: The four-way seat doeadjustment.




Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving isdangerous. The sudden movement of the seat couldcause you to lose control. The seat belt might not beproperly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjustany seat only while the vehicle is parked.

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under any seat as it maycause damage to the seat controls.

Four-Way Passenger’s Power Seat — If EquippedThe front passenger’s power seat switches are located on

the outboard side of the passenger’s seat. The bottomswitch controls forward/rearward adjustment. The topswitch controls the seatback recline adjustment.

WARNIN

Adjusting a seat while thedangerous. The sudden move

cause you to lose control. Theproperly adjusted and you coany seat only while the vehic

CAUTIO

Do not place any article undcause damage to the seat cont

Head RestraintsHead restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the eventof a rear impact Adjustable head restraints should be

WARNIN

Driving a vehicle with the hea




of a rear impact. Adjustable head restraints should beadjusted so that the upper edge is as high as practical.The head restraints have a locking button which must bepushed in to lower the head restraint to all positions. Therestraints may be raised without pushing in the button.

Driving a vehicle with the heaimproperly adjusted could cdeath in the event of a collisioshould always be checked vehicle and never adjusted wmotion. Always adjust the hevehicle is in PARK.

Front Heated Seats — If EquThe front driver and passengecontrols for each heater are lcenter of the instrument paneconditioning controls). The he

average heat level for both the c

Adjustable Head Restraints

After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,Low or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in eachswitch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator

two to one, indicating the changwill turn Off automatically afteutes




switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicatorlights will illuminate for High, one for Low and none forOff.

Press the switch once to select High-level heat-

ing. Press the switch a second time to selectLow-level heating. Press the switch a third timeto shut the heating elements Off.

When the High-level setting is selected, the heater willprovide a boosted heat level during the first four minutesof operation. Then, the heat output will drop to thenormal High-level. If the High-level setting is selected,the system will automatically switch to Low-level after

approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. Atthat time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from

utes.

NOTE: Once a heat setting is within two to five minutes.

WARNIN• Persons who are unable to

because of advanced age, chspinal cord injury, medichaustion or other physicalcise care when using the seburns even at low temperatfor long periods of time.


• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates




p y gagainst heat, such as a blanket or cushion. Thismay cause the seat heater to overheat. To avoidheated seat surfaces coming in contact with eachother and potential seat overheating, ALWAYS

ensure that the seat heater is in the Off position(amber lights indicate High/Low/Off) before plac-ing any of the seats into a folded flat position (ifequipped).

Rear Heated Seats — If EquippedOn vehicles equipped with rear heated seats, the seatsclosest to the doors are heated. The controls for these

seats are located on the rear of the center console.

After turning the ignition ON, yoLow or Off heat settings. Ambe

switch indicate the level of helights will illuminate for High, oOff.

Rear Heated Seat

Press the switch once to select High-level heat-ing. Press the switch a second time to selectLow-level heating Press the switch a third time

WARNIN

• Persons who are unable to




Low level heating. Press the switch a third timeto shut the heating elements Off.

When the High-level setting is selected, the heater willprovide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes

of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to thenormal High-level. If the High-level setting is selected,the system will automatically switch to Low-level afterapproximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. Atthat time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes fromtwo to one, indicating the change. The Low-level settingwill turn Off automatically after approximately 30 min-utes.

NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be feltwithin two to five minutes.

• Persons who are unable tobecause of advanced age, chspinal cord injury, medichaustion or other physicalcise care when using the se

burns even at low temperatfor long periods of time.

• Do not place anything on against heat, such as a blamay cause the seat heaterheated seat surfaces cominother and potential seat ovsure that the seat heater

(amber lights indicate Highing any of the seats into a equipped).

60/40 Split Rear Seat

To Lower Rear SeatEi h id f h b l d ll f




Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow forextended cargo space and still maintain some rear seatingroom.

NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and

positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback tofold down easily.

1. Pull the release strap (toward the front of the vehicle)to release.

NOTE: Do not fold the rear sseat belt buckled.

Rear Seat Re

2. Fold the rear seat completely forward. To Raise Rear SeatRaise the rear seatback and lockence from the cargo area preven




g plocking, you will have difficultyproper position.

WARNIN

The cargo area in the rear of thseatbacks in the locked-up orshould not be used as a play the vehicle is in motion. Thinjured in an accident. Childand using the proper restrain

Rear Seat Folded

Storage (Rear Seat Armrest) — If EquippedThe rear seat may be equipped with a center storagearmrest.

Press the latch and lift the top ofstorage bin.




Rear Seat Armrest

Armrest Storag

DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPEDOnce programmed, the memory buttons 1 and 2 on thedriver’s door panel can be used to recall the driver’s seat,




pdriver’s outside mirror, adjustable brake and acceleratorpedals and radio station preset settings. Your RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be pro-grammed to recall the same positions when the UN-

LOCK button is pressed.

Your vehicle is equipped with twor both RKE transmitters can be

position. The memory system four RKE transmitters, each ontwo memory positions.

Driver Memory

Setting Memory Positions and Linking RemoteKeyless Entry Transmitter to Memory

NOTE: Each time the S (SET) button and a numbered

5. Turn on the radio and set theto 12 AM and 12 FM stations ca

6 Turn the ignition switch to




NOTE: Each time the S (SET) button and a numbered button 1 or 2 are pressed, you erase the memory settingsfor that button and store a new one.

1. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to

the ON position.

2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 ifyou are setting the memory for driver 1, or buttonnumber 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. Thesystem will recall any stored settings. Wait for the systemto complete the memory recall before continuing toStep 3.

3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s sideviewmirror to the desired positions.

4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desiredpositions.

6. Turn the ignition switch to remove the key.

7. Press and release the S (SETdriver’s door.

8. Within five seconds, press button 1 or 2 on the driver’s doperformed within five seconds iRKE transmitter to recall memo

9. Press and release the LOCK btransmitters.

10. Insert the ignition key, and tuthe ON position.

11. Select Remote Linked to Memory in the ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter Yes. Referto “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —

To recall the memory settingMEMORY button number 2 onUNLOCK button on the RKE




Customer-Programmable Features” in Section 4 for moreinformation.

12. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory

position, using the other numbered memory button, or tolink another RKE transmitter to memory.

Memory Position Recall

NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memorypositions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is notin PARK, a message will be displayed in the ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC).

To recall the memory settings for driver one, pressMEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door, or theUNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked tomemory position 1.

memory position 2.

A recall can be cancelled bMEMORY buttons on the driver

1, or 2). When a recall is cancdriver’s mirror and the pedals one second will occur beforeselected.

To Disable a RKE Transmitte

1. Turn the ignition switch to remove the key.

2. Press and release MEMORYsystem will recall any memory s1. Wait for the system to comp before continuing to Step 3.

3. Press and release the memory S (SET) button locatedon the driver’s door.

4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY

There are two possible Easy available:

• The seat cushion will move r




4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door.

5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.

To disable another RKE transmitter linked to eithermemory position, repeat steps 1 through 5 for each RKEtransmitter.

NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked tomemory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.Refer to Remote Linked to Memory under ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features in Section 4 for more information.

Easy Entry/Exit SeatThis feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioningwhich will enhance driver mobility out of and into thevehicle.

• The seat cushion will move r2.5 in (60 mm), if the startingreater than or equal to 2.67 irear seat stop when the ke

ignition switch. The seat wapproximately 2.5 in (60 mminto the ignition and turned o

• The seat will move to the (8 mm) forward of the rear stis between 0.9 to 2.67 in (23 trear stop when the key is remswitch. The seat will move f

driving position when the ignition, and turned out of ththe ACC/ON position.

The Easy Entry/Exit feature will be automatically dis-abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0.9 in(23 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE Two latches must be released to

1 Pull the release lever inside y




is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for EasyExit/Entry.

Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy

Entry/Exit position.NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabledwhen the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The EasyEntry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) throughthe programmable features in the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC). Refer to Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC) — Customer-ProgrammableFeatures in Section 4 for more information.

1. Pull the release lever inside ythe instrument panel and in fro

Hood Release

2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the leftand lift the hood.

CAUTIO

To prevent possible damage, d




close it. Use a firm downwarthe hood to ensure that both l

WARNINIf the hood is not fully latchethe vehicle is moving and bloBe sure all hood latches ardriving.

Safety Latch Location

LIGHTS

Multifunction LeverThe multifunction lever controls the operation of the

Headlights and Parking LighTurn the end of the multifunctiofor parking light operation. Turnh dli ht ti T t th




e u t u ct o e e co t o s t e ope at o o t eheadlights, turn signals, headlight beam selection, instru-ment panel light dimming, passing light, interior courtesy/dome lights and optional fog lights. The multifunction

lever is located on the left side of the steering wheel.

headlight operation. Turn to thmatic Headlight operation (if eq

Multifunction Lever

Headlight S

Automatic Headlight System — If EquippedTurn the end of the multifunction lever to the third detent(AUTO) to activate the Automatic Headlight system.

Headlights On AutomaticallyIf your vehicle is equipped withalso has this customer-progra

h dli ht i th

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURE



This system performs two functions. With the enginerunning and the multifunction lever in the AUTO posi-tion, the headlights will turn on and off based on thesurrounding light levels.

your headlights are in the auengine is running, they will autthe wiper system is on. Refer tWipers” under “Electronic Veh

(EVIC) Customer-Programmabl

If your vehicle is equipped withSystem” and it is activated, the hcally turn on after the wipers cwithin approximately one minuapproximately four minutes aftstop. Refer to “Windshield Wipsection.

NOTE: When your headlights come on during thedaytime, the instrument panel lights will automaticallydim to the lower nighttime intensity. Refer to “Instru-ment Panel and Interior Lights” for setting the instru

To Activate

1. Select “Auto High Beams.” hicle Information Center




ment Panel and Interior Lights for setting the instru-ment panel lights to full daytime intensity.

SmartBeam™ — If EquippedThe SmartBeam™ system provides increased forwardlighting at night by automating high beam controlthrough the use of a digital camera mounted on theinside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle spe-cific light and automatically switches from high beams tolow beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.

NOTE: If the windshield or SmartBeam™ mirror isreplaced, the SmartBeam™ mirror must be re-aimed to

ensure proper performance. See your local authorizeddealer.

Programmable Features” in Sec

2. Turn the end of the multifunheadlight position.

3. Push the multifunction leverfront of vehicle) to engage the h

NOTE: This system will not acat or above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Deactivate

1. Pull back on the multifun

deactivate the system (normal o2. Push back on the multifuncreactivate the system.

NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights andtaillights of vehicles in the field of view will causeheadlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).Also dirt film and other obstructions (sticker toll box

Automatic Headlight LevelinOnlyThis feature prevents the heawith the vision of oncoming dr




Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions (sticker, toll box,etc.) on the windshield or camera lens will cause thesystem to function improperly.

Daytime Running Lights — If EquippedThe high beam headlights come on at a low intensitylevel whenever the engine is running, and the transmis-sion is not in the PARK position. The lights will remainon until the ignition switch is turned to LOCK/ACC orthe parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving.

with the vision of oncoming drautomatically adjusts the heightreaction to changes in vehicle p

Instrument Panel and InterioWhen the multifunction leverheadlight, or AUTO position (icenter portion of the lever up andecrease the brightness (dimmment panel lights. Full daytimtronic displays (odometer, overAutomatic Temperature Control by rotating the center portion o

detent above the dimmer rangethe second detent above the dinterior lights on. Rotating th(extreme bottom) position disab

even when the doors and liftgate are open. While in the“Off” position the instrument panel lighting is at thelowest light level and may not be suitable for nightdriving

Battery Saver FeatureIf the multifunction lever is lposition, parking light position,when the ignition switch is mov




driving. when the ignition switch is movthe battery saver feature will auexterior and interior lights afteoperation will resume when the

when the headlight switch is tu

Lights-On ReminderIf the headlights or parking lightswitch has been turned to LOsound when the driver’s door i

Dimmer Control

Fog Lights — If EquippedThe fog light switch is located in the multifunctionlever. To activate the fog lights, turn on the park/turn lights low beam headlights or the Automatic

NOTE:• Turning on the high beam he

lights.




turn lights, low beam headlights or the AutomaticHeadlights and pull out the end of the multifunctionlever. A light in the instrument cluster shows when thefog lights are on.

• A front fog light is a lightinillumination in front of the vefog, rain, snow, or dust. Thement the low beams of a stan

• Proper aim and adjustmentshould be made to prevent edrivers.

Front Fog Light Control

Turn SignalsMove the multifunction lever up or down and the arrowson each side of the instrument cluster flash to showproper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights

NOTE: If either light remains there is a very fast flash rate, chelight bulb. If an indicator fails tmoved it would suggest tha




proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. moved, it would suggest thadefective.

Lane Change AssistTap the lever up or down once,the detent, and the turn signalthree times then automatically t

High/Low Beam SwitchPush the multifunction lever athe headlights to high beam. Putoward you to switch the headl

Flash-to-Pass

You can signal another vehiclmultifunction lever toward the turn on the high beam headlreleased.

Turn Signal Control

Headlight Time DelayThis feature delays turning off the headlights for 30, 60 or90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Toactivate the headlight delay, the multifunction lever must

Interior LightsThe interior lighting consists of cinstrument panel), an overheacontains both driver and passen




activate the headlight delay, the multifunction lever must be rotated to the “Off” position after the ignition switchis turned to LOCK/ACC. Only the headlights will illu-minate during this time. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC) Customer-ProgrammableFeatures” in Section 4 to turn this feature “On/Off” or setthe time interval.

contains both driver and passening lights (located above the realight. Opening a door, pressing the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE

the center of the multifunctionposition, will activate all interio

Front Map/Reading Lights

These lights are mounted in the overhead console. Eachlight can be turned on by pressing the recessed area of thel T t th li ht ff th d f th




lens. To turn these lights off, press the recessed area of thelens a second time. There are also reading lights locatedabove the rear doors. Each light can be turned on bypressing the front recessed area of the lens. To turn theselights off, press the recessed area of the lens a secondtime.

Front Map/Readi

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERSThe windshield wiper/washer control lever is located onthe right side of the steering column. The front wipers areoperated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the

Windshield Wiper OperationRotate the end of the lever upwalow-speed wiper operation.

Rotate the end of the lever upw




p y g ,lever. For information on the rear wiper/washer, refer to“Rear Window Features” in this section.

Rotate the end of the lever upwhigh-speed wiper operation.

Windshield Wiper/Washer SwitchFront Wiper C

CAUTION!

Always remove any buildup of snow that preventsthe windshield wiper blades from returning to the

WARNIN

Sudden loss of visibility thcould lead to an accident. Yo




p g“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch isturned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

Windshield Washer OperationTo use the washer, pull the lever toward you and holdwhile spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in thedelay range, the wiper will operate for several secondsafter the lever is released, and then resume the intermit-tent interval previously selected.

If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers

will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.

vehicles or other obstacles. Tothe windshield during freeziwindshield with the defrost

windshield washer use.

MistUse the Mist feature when woccasional usage of the wipers nrelease the control lever for a si

delay interval. The delay can bemum of approximately 18 secocycle every 1/2 second.




Intermittent Wiper SystemUse one of the five intermittent wiper speeds whenweather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with avariable pause between cycles, desirable. Turn the end ofthe lever to one of the five delay positions for the desired

NOTE: The wiper delay times If the vehicle is moving less tdelay times will be doubled.

Mist Control

Front Wiper C

Rain Sensing Wipers — If EquippedThis feature senses moisture on the windshield andautomatically activates the wipers for the driver. Thefeature is especially useful for road splash or overspray

NOTE:• The Rain Sensing feature wi

wiper switch is in the low or

• The Rain Sensing feature ma




from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotatethe end of the multifunction lever to one of five settingsto activate this feature.

The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with themultifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the leastsensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensi-tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires lesswiper sensitivity. Settings 4 and 5 can be used if thedriver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch inthe OFF position when not using the system.

• The Rain Sensing feature mawhen ice, or dried salt watershield.

•

Use of Rain-X or products cmay reduce Rain Sensing per

• A customer programmable Vehicle Information Center Sensing feature to be turned oWiper” under “Electronic Ve(EVIC) — Customer-Programtion 4 of this manual.

The Rain Sensing system has protection features for thewiper blades and arms, and will not operate under thefollowing conditions:

• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is

TILT/TELESCOPING STEERIThis feature allows you to tupward or downward. It also ashorten the steering column. Th




• Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition isfirst turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will notoperate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speedis greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-

perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).

• Transmission in NEUTRAL Position — When theignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU-TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will notoperate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speedis greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever ismoved out of the NEUTRAL position.

handle is located below the steethe steering column.

Tilt/Telescoping Co

To unlock the steering column, push the control handledownward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,move the steering wheel upward or downward as de-sired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull

improved position with the steable pedal system is designed todriver comfort for steering wheThe position of the brake and a




the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired.To lock the steering column in position, push the controlhandle upward until fully engaged.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Thetelescoping adjustment must be locked while driv-ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving ordriving without the telescoping adjustment lockedcould cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPEDThis feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedalsto move toward or away from the driver to provide

adjusted without compromisinactuating the pedals.

Adjustable Peda

Press the bottom of the switch to move the pedalsforward (away from the driver).

Press the top of the switch to move the pedals rearward(toward the driver).

CAUTIO

Do not place any article underor impede its ability to move




(toward the driver).

• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.

• The pedals can be adjusted while driving.

• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is inREVERSE (R) or when the Electronic Speed Control ison. A message will be displayed in the ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC) if the pedals areattempted to be adjusted when the system is lockedout (“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise ControlSet” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Shifter In Re-verse”). Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) in Section 4 for more information.

to the pedal controls. Pedal trited if movement is stopped badjustable pedal’s path.

WARNIN

Do not adjust the pedals whilYou could lose control and haadjust the pedals while the v

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONT

When engaged, Electronic Spaccelerator operations at speed(40 km/h).

The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the rightside of the steering wheel.

simultaneously. If this occurs, thtrol System can be reactivated bSpeed Control ON/OFF button vehicle set speed.




NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shutdown if multiple Speed Control functions are operated

To ActivatePush the ON/OFF button. The the instrument cluster will illum

OFF, push the ON/OFF button aIndicator Light will turn off. turned OFF when not in use.

WARNIN

Leaving the Electronic Speewhen not in use is dangerous.set the system or cause it to gYou could lose control and haleave the system OFF when y

Electronic Speed Control Lever

To Set a Desired SpeedWhen the vehicle has reached the desired speed, pressdown on the lever and release. Release the acceleratorand the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

To Vary the Speed SettingWhen the Electronic Speed Cospeed can be increased by pRESUME ACCEL. Release the

d i h d d th




NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steadyspeed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.

To DeactivateA soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the lever towardyou, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehiclewill deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasingthe set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button orturning off the ignition switch erases the set speedmemory.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RESUMEACCEL lever up and release. Resume can be used at anyspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

speed is reached, and the new s

Tapping RESUME ACCEL onc(2 km/h) speed increase. Each

the vehicle speed increases, sothree times will increase speed

To decrease the vehicle speedControl is on, push down and hthe lever when the desired speedspeed will be set.

Tapping the SET DECEL butt

1 mph (2 km/h) speed decreasetapped, vehicle speed decreases

To Accelerate for PassingPress the accelerator as you would normally. When thepedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills

Section and Note Section for liand recommendations.

The Rear Park Assist will remem(enabled or disabled) from the




g pThe transmission may downshift on hills to maintain thevehicle set speed.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control System maintainsspeed up and down hills. A slight speed change onmoderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur soit may be preferable to drive without Electronic SpeedControl.

REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED

The Rear Park Assist provides visible and audible indi-cations of the distance between the rear fascia and thedetected obstacle when backing up. Refer to the Warning

( )the ignition is changed to the O

The Rear Park Assist can be ac

lever is in REVERSE. If the Rearthis shift lever position, the systevehicle speed is increased to (18 km/h) or above. The systemvehicle speed is decreased to smately 10 mph (16 km/h).

Rear Park Assist SensorsThe four Rear Park Assist Sen

fascia, monitor the area behind the sensors’ field of view.

The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12to 59 in (30 to 150 cm) from the rear fascia in thehorizontal direction, depending on the location andorientation of the obstacle and the type of obstacle.




Rear Park Assist Warning DisplayThe Rear Park Assist Warning Display, located in theheadliner near the flipper glass, provides both visible and

audible warnings to indicate the distance between therear fascia and the detected obstacle.

When the ignition is turned twarning display will turn ON one second. Each side of the wyellow and two red LEDs. Thobstacle when the red LED is O

Rear Park Assis

The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellowLEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles. Thefollowing chart shows the warning display operationwhen the system is detecting an obstacle:

WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES




WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES

DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM: LED COLOR

REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER

1st LED 59 in (150 cm) Yellow 2nd LED 51 in (130 cm) Yellow

3rd LED 45 in (115 cm) Yellow

4th LED 31.5 in (80 cm) 39 in (100 cm) Yellow

5th LED 25.5 in (65 cm) 33.5 in (85 cm) Yellow

6th LED 20 in (50 cm) 28 in (70 cm) Yellow

7th LED 16 in (40 cm) 20 in (50 cm) Red

8th LED 6 in (15 cm) 12 in (30 cm) Red NOTE: The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE theradio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

Enable/Disable The Rear Park AssistThe Rear Park Assist can be enabled and disabled with aswitch located on the upper switch bank of the instru-ment panel.

The Rear Park Assist Switch LERear Park Assist is disabled or Assist Switch LED will be Oenabled.




Press the switch once to turn the Rear ParkAssist on, push the switch a second time toturn the Rear Park Assist off.

When the switch is pressed to disable the system, theinstrument cluster will display the “PARK ASSIST DIS-ABLED” message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-tion Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. When theshift lever is changed to REVERSE and the system isdisabled, the instrument cluster will actuate a singlechime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the

message.

Service The Rear Park AssisWhen the Rear Park Assist is dcluster will actuate a single c

cycle, and it will display the “SSYSTEM” message. Refer to “Eletion Center (EVIC)” in Sectio“SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEafter making sure the rear fascfree of snow, ice, mud, or otherrized dealer.

Cleaning The Rear Park AssistClean the Rear Park Assist Sensors with water, car washsoap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Donot scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you coulddamage the sensors

• When you move the shift position and the Rear Park Asthe instrument cluster will DISABLED” message for as REVERSE




damage the sensors.

System Usage Precautions

NOTE:• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris

to keep the Rear Park Assist System operating prop-erly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations couldaffect the performance of the Rear Park Assist System.

• When you turn off the Rear Park Assist System, theinstrument cluster will display “PARK ASSIST DIS-

ABLED.” Furthermore, once you turn off the RearPark Assist System, it remains off until you turn it onagain, even if you cycle the ignition key.

REVERSE.

• The Rear Park Assist System,radio when it is sounding a t

• If a Rear Park Assist Systemsingle chime will sound onaddition, the Electronic Veh(EVIC) will display “SERVITEM”. If this occurs makin bumper is free from snow, icsee your authorized dealer.

• Clean the Rear Park Assist Sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them. The sensors mustnot be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt, ordebris. Failure to do so can result in the system notworking properly. The system might not detect an

CAUTIO

• The Rear Park Assist Systeand it is unable to recogncluding small obstacles P




working properly. The system might not detect anobstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could providea false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/

bumper.• Objects must not be within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear

fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to doso can result in the system misinterpreting a closeobject as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICEPARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed inthe instrument cluster.

cluding small obstacles. Ptemporarily detected or nstacles located above or bel

be detected when they are • The vehicle must be driven

Rear Park Assist System towhen the obstacle is detectthat the driver looks over using the Rear Park Assist

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing up evenwhen using the Rear Park Assist System. Alwayscheck carefully behind your vehicle, look behind

WARNING! (C

• Before using the Rear Parstrongly recommended thahitch ball assembly is disc




check carefully behind your vehicle, look behindyou, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots be-

fore backing up. You are responsible for safety andmust continue to pay attention to your surround-ings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury ordeath.

(Continued)

hicle when the vehicle isFailure to do so can result vehicles or obstacles becau

much closer to the obstacwhen the warning displaflashing arc and sounds thethe sensors could detect thball assembly, depending giving a false indication thathe vehicle.

REAR CAMERA — IF EQUIPPEDVehicles may be equipped with a rearview camera (lo-cated on the rear liftgate) that allows you to see anon-screen image (on the Navigation/Multimedia radio)of the rear of your vehicle, whenever the vehicle is put

CAUTIO

• To avoid vehicle damage, thshould only be used as a Camera system is unable to




y , pinto REVERSE.

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even whenusing the Rear Camera System. Always check care-fully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check forpedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, orblind spots before backing up. You are responsiblefor the safety of your surroundings and must con-tinue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do

so can result in serious injury or death.

y t tobject in your drive path.

• To avoid vehicle damage,

driven slowly when using tto be able to stop in time whIt is recommended that theover his/her shoulder whensystem.

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or anthe camera lens, clean the lens, rwith a soft cloth. Do not cover

Turning the Rear Camera On or Off — WithNavigation Radio

1. Press the menu hard key.

2. Select system setup soft key.

Turning the Rear Camera OnNavigation Radio

1. Press the menu hard key.

2. Select system setup soft key




y p y

3. Press the “camera setup” soft key.

4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selectingenable rear camera in reverse soft key.

5. Press the “save” soft key.

6. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image ofthe rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note tocheck entire surroundings displayed across the top ofthe screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.

7. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rearcamera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screenappears again.

y p y

3. Enable or disable the rear camenable rear camera in reverse

4. When the vehicle is shifted inthe rear of the vehicle will appecheck entire surroundings disthe screen. After five seconds th

5. When the vehicle is shifted ocamera mode is exited and thagain.

OVERHEAD CONSOLEThe overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door Opener(HomeLink) and power sunroof switches may also beincluded, if equipped.

Courtesy/Reading Lights

At the forward end of the conreading lights.

Press the lens to turn these light




q pp gto turn the lights off.

The lights also turn on when a f

opened. The lights will also tur button on the Remote Keyless Epressed.

Sunglasses StorageAt the rear of the console a comthe storage of a pair of sunglass

The storage compartment acce

sign. Push the finger depressionto open. Push the finger depresOverhead Console

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPEDHomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (hand-held transmitters) that operate devices such as garagedoor openers, motorized gates, lighting or home securitysystems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s




battery.

The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead

console and contain one, two, or three dots/lines desig-nating the different HomeLink channels.

NOTE: HomeLink is disabledrity Alarm is active.

HomeLink B

WARNING!

• Your motorized door or gate will open and closewhile you are training the Universal Transceiver.Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in

Programming HomeLink

Before You BeginIf you have not trained any of erase all channels before you be




the path of the door or gate. Only use this trans-ceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stopand reverse” feature as required by federal safetystandards. This includes most garage door openermodels manufactured after 1982. Do not use agarage door opener without these safety features.Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet atwww.HomeLink.com for safety information or as-sistance.

• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage

while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas cancause serious injury or death.

To do this, press and hold the twto 20 seconds. The EVIC wiCHANNELS.” Release the buttsage states “CHANNELS CLEA

It is recommended that a new hand-held transmitter of the deto HomeLink for more efficietransmission of the radio-freque

Your vehicle should be parkewhile training.

1. Turn the ignition switch to th

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVICdisplay in view.

For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand-held transmitter away from the HomeLink

NOTE: Some gate operators amay require you to replace Stepin the “Gate Operator/Canadia

4. Press and hold the just-trainthe channel has been trained th




held transmitter away from the HomeLink .

3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosenHomeLink button and the hand-held transmitter buttonuntil the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL #TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”

Then release both the HomeLink and hand-held trans-mitter buttons.

If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeatStep 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in theoriginal hand-held transmitter.

It may take up to 30 seconds, or longer in rare cases. Thegarage door may open and close while you train.

the channel has been trained, thstate “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT

If the EVIC display still statesING” repeat Step 3.

NOTE: After training a Homgarage door does not operate wgarage door opener was manugarage door opener may have roto the heading “Programming A

5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLI

At the garage door opener motthe “learn” or “training” button

This can usually be found where the hanging antennawire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it isNOT the button normally used to open and close thedoor).

6. Firmly press and release theING” button. The name and colo by manufacturer.

NOTE: There are 30 seconds instep after the “Learn” button ha




step after the Learn button ha

7. Return to the vehicle and HomeLink button twice (holseconds each time). If the deactivates, programming is comp

If the device does not activate,time (for two seconds) to comp

If you have any problems or rcall toll-free 1–800–355–3515 www.HomeLink.com for inform

To program the remaining twrepeat each step for each remaerase the channels.

1 — Garage Door Opener2 — Training Button

Gate Operator/Canadian ProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds oftransmission – which may not be long enough forHomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.Si il t thi C di l U S t t

has successfully accepted theEVIC display will change fromING” to “CHANNEL # TRAIN

If you unplugged the device forat this time.




Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators aredesigned to “time-out” in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cyclingprocess to prevent possible overheating of the garagedoor or gate motor.

If you are having difficulties programming a garage dooropener or a gate operator, replace “ProgrammingHomeLink” Step 3 with the following:

3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button

while you press and release - every two seconds(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink

Then proceed with Step 4HomeLink” earlier in this sect

Using HomeLinkTo operate, simply press and rHomeLink button. Activationtrained device (i.e., garage doosecurity system, entry door locetc.) The hand-held transmitter used at any time.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink ButtonTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

2 P d h ld th d i d H Li k b tt f

The HomeLink Universal Tranthe Vehicle Security Alarm is ac

Troubleshooting TipsIf you are having trouble prograare some of the most common s




2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for20 seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL #TRAINING.” Do not release the button.

3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

SecurityIt is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turnin your vehicle.

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for

20 seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELSCLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Indi-vidual channels cannot be erased.

• Replace the battery in the ori

•

Press the learn button on thcomplete the training for roll

• Did you unplug the device foto plug it back in?

If you are having any problemplease call toll-free 1–800–355–3www.HomeLink.com for inform

General InformationThis device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and IndustryCanada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQThe power sunroof switch is lvisors on the overhead console.




y

2. This device must accept any interference that may bereceived including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complieswith FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to operate thedevice.

The term “IC:” before the certification/registration num-

ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-cations were met.

Power Sunroof

WARNING!

• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key inthe ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-tended children, can become entrapped by thepower sunroof while operating the power sunroof

Opening Sunroof — ExpressPress the switch rearward and will open automatically from anwill open fully, then stop auto“Express Open”. During Expremovement of the sunroof switc




power sunroof while operating the power sunroofswitch. Such entrapment may result in seriousinjury or death.

• In an accident, there is a greater risk of beingthrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. Youcould also be seriously injured or killed. Alwaysfasten your seat belt properly and make sure allpassengers are properly secured too.

• Do not allow small children to operate the sun-roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, orany object to project through the sunroof opening.

Injury may result.

movement of the sunroof switc

Closing Sunroof — Express

Press the switch forward and will close automatically from awill close fully and stop auto“Express Close”. During Expremovement of the switch will sto

Pinch Protect FeatureThis feature will detect an obstrthe sunroof during Express Cl

struction is detected, the sunrotract. Remove the obstruction ithe switch forward and release

Pinch Protect OverrideIf a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closingthe sunroof, press the switch forward and hold for twoseconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroofto move toward the closed position.

NOTE: The sunshade cannot bopen.

Wind BuffetingWind buffeting can be describpressure on the ears or a helic




NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch ispressed.

Venting Sunroof — ExpressPress and release the “Vent” button, and the sunroof willopen to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,and will occur regardless of sunroof position. DuringExpress Vent operation, any movement of the switch willstop the sunroof.

Sunshade OperationThe sunshade can be opened manually. However, thesunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

ears. Your vehicle may exhibit windows down, or the sunroof

open or partially open positionsrence and can be minimized. If the rear windows open, open thetogether to minimize the buffetinwith the sunroof open, adjustminimize the buffeting or open

Sunroof MaintenanceUse only a non-abrasive cleaner

the glass panel.

Ignition OFF OperationThe power sunroof switches remain active for up ap-proximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancelthis feature.

NOTE:• Do not exceed the maximum

Amps) at 12 Volts for either o

• All accessories connected tooutlets should be removed




Sunroof Fully ClosedPress the switch forward and release to ensure that the

sunroof is fully closed.

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETSYour vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt power outlets thatcan be used to power cellular phones, small electronicsand other low powered electrical accessories. The poweroutlets are labeled with either a “key” or a “battery”symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Poweroutlets labeled with a “key” are powered when the

ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while theoutlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly tothe battery and powered at all times.

vehicle is not in use to prodischarge.

• To ensure proper operationelement must be used.

The front power outlets are located to the left and right ofthe convenience tray (lower center of instrument panel).Pull lightly on the tab of the plastic cover to access thesepower outlets.

The power outlet located on th be used to power a convention

The rear power outlet (if equiprear cargo area.




Front Power Outlets Rear Power O

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use and while driving

CAUTIO

• Many accessories that canpower from the vehicle’s bause (i.e., cellular phonesplugged in long enough, th




• Close the lid when not in use and while drivingthe vehicle.

•

If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause anelectric shock and failure.

plugged in long enough, thdischarge sufficiently to and/or prevent the engine f

• Accessories that draw highvacuum cleaners, lights, battery even more quicklymittently and with greater

• After the use of high powlong periods of the vehicle accessories still plugged indriven a sufficient length

generator to recharge the v

POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPEDThere is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the back of the center console to convert DC current to ACcurrent. This outlet can power cellular phones, electron-ics and other low power devices requiring power up to150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Play-




g g , ystation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as willmost power tools.

Power Inve

The power inverter is designed with built-in overloadprotection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,the power inverter will automatically shut down. Oncethe electrical device has been removed from the outlet theinverter should automatically reset. If the power ratingexceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter




pp y , pmay have to be reset manually. To reset the invertermanually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.

To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratingson electrical devices prior to using the inverter.

Press the power inverter switch (located on the upperswitch bank) to turn the power on to the outlet. Press theswitch again to turn the power off.

NOTE: When the power invthere will be a delay of approximthe inverter status indicator turn

tor of the AC power inverteinverter is producing AC power

Power Inverter

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.

• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.

• Do not touch with wet hands

CUPHOLDERSThere are two cupholders for tlocated in the center console.




• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use.

•

If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electricshock and failure.

The rear passengers have accespull out from the lower center o

Front Cupho

the cargo light lens surface will Push on the lens surface a secinterior lights to normal operati

Rear Storage CompartmentThe rear storage compartment iside behind the second row sea




CARGO AREA FEATURES

Cargo LightThe cargo area light is activated by opening the liftgate,opening any door, or by rotating the dimmer control onthe multifunction lever to the extreme top position. If alldoors are closed and only the liftgate is open, pushing on

side behind the second row sea

Rear Cupholders

Rear Storage Com

Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped

NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not tosecure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting orprotect passengers from loose cargo.

To cover the cargo area:




1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the

cargo area.2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots inthe pillar trim cover.

3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover inplace.

Rear Cargo C

WARNING!

In an accident, a loose cargo cover in the vehiclecould cause injury. It could fly around in a suddenstop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not storethe cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger

Cargo Tie-Down HooksThe cargo tie-downs, located should be used to safely secure moving.




compartment. Remove the cover from the vehiclewhen taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the

vehicle.

Cargo Tie-Dow

WARNING!

• To help protect against personal injury, passengersshould not be seated in the rear cargo area. Therear cargo space is intended for load carryingpurposes only, not for passengers, who should sit

WARNING! (C

• Do not carry loads which described on the label attaleft door center pillar.

• Always place cargo evenlyh i bj t l




in seats and use seat belts.

• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a

child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, a hook could pull loose and allow the childseat to come loose. A child could be badly injured.Use only the anchors provided for child seattethers.

The weight and position of cargo and passengerscan change the vehicle center of gravity and ve-hicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting

in personal injury, follow these guidelines forloading your vehicle:

(Continued)

heavier objects as low apossible.

• Place as much cargo as possaxle. Too much weight weight over or behind the rear of the vehicle to sway.

• Do not pile luggage or cargthe seatback. This could icome a dangerous projecticollision.

Cargo Load Floor

The panel in the load floor is reversible for added utility.One side is carpeted and the other side features a plasticlined tray which holds a variety of items.

The cargo load floor is held by order to use the cargo load procedure:

NOTE: The cargo load flooused as cargo tie-downs.

1 Fli h ll l ( )




1. Flip up the pull loop(s) so(straight up) to the top surface

2. Pull up on the loop(s) and twparallel to the slotted hole in th

3. Lift the tray over the loop(s)

4. Pull up on the loop(s) and twperpendicular (straight up) to th

5. Push the loop(s) back down,

top of the tray.Cargo Load Floor

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary switchlocated on the control lever. The control lever is locatedon the right side of the steering column.

Rotate the switch upwardactivate the rear wiper.

NOTE: The rear wiper operateonly.

Rotate the switch upwardt ti t th t h




to activate that rear washecontinue to operate as lo

engaged. Upon release, the wip before returning to the set posi

If the rear wiper is operating whOFF, the wiper will automaticaposition if power accessory delasory delay can be cancelled by happens, the rear wiper will stoand will not go to “park”.

Rear Wiper/Washer Control

If the liftgate flipper glass is open, connection to the rearwindow wiper is interrupted preventing activation of therear wiper blade. When the liftgate flipper glass is closed,the rear wiper switch, or the ignition switch, needs to beturned OFF and ON to restart the rear wiper.

Rear Window Defroster

CAUTIO

Failure to follow these cautiothe heating elements:

• Use care when washing twindow. Do not use abrasih i i f f h




The rear window defroster button is located on theclimate control panel. Press this button to turn on

the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminatewhen the rear window defroster is on. The rear windowdefroster automatically turns off after approximately10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,press the button a second time.

NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear

window defroster only when the engine is operating.

the interior surface of the wand a mild washing soluti

the heating elements. Labafter soaking with warm w

• Do not use scrapers, sharpsive window cleaners on thwindow.

• Keep all objects a safe dist



UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT

CONTENTS

I P l F 1 4 D S l bl S d



Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 167

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

▫ Performance Pages — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 174

▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

▫ Driver-Selectable SurroundIf Equipped . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Personal Settings (CustomeFeatures) . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ System Status . . . . . . . . .

Sales Code (RER/REN) — ARadio – If Equipped . . . . . .

▫ Operating Instructions — V

System (VR) — If Equippe

▫ Operating Instructions — u— If Equipped . . . . . . . .

▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio WithCD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . 187

▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD

▫ List Button (CD Mode For

▫ Info Button (CD Mode For

Universal Consumer InterfacIf Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Connecting The iPod . .

152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL



And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . 192

▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . 195

Sales Code RES/RSC — AM/FM Stereo RadioWith CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And SiriusRadio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . 196

▫Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CDAnd MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . 204

▫ Using This Feature . . . .

▫ Controlling The iPod UsinButtons . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . .

▫ List Or Browse Mode . .

uconnect™ studios (Satellite If Equipped (REN/RER/RES

▫ System Activation . . . . .

▫ Electronic Serial Number/SiriusIdentification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 214

▫ Selecting uconnect™ studios (Satellite)Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Video Entertainment System™(Sales Code XRV) — If Equip

▫ Kicker Mobile Surround (If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .

Remote Sound System ContrIf Equipped

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

▫ Operating Instructions - uconnect™ studios(Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

▫ Operating Instructions - uconnect™ phone(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Kicker High Performance Sound System WithDriver-Selectable Surround (DSS) –If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

uconnect™ studios (Sirius Backseat TV™) —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Radio Operation . . . . . .

▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . .

CD/DVD Maintenance . .

Radio Operation And Cellula

Climate Controls . . . . . . .

▫ Automatic Temperature Co

▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . .

▫ Operating Tips Chart . .

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES




1 — Air Outlet 5 — Upper Switch Bank 9 — Lower Sw

2 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter 10 — Climate C3 — Radio 7 — Storage Bin 11 — Ignition S4 — Glove Compartment 8 — Power Outlet 12 — Storage B

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION

1. Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed.

2. Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions,including brake fluid level and parking brake

the brake booster, the ABS pumpthe brake and a brake pedal puleach stop.

The dual brake system providesity in the event of a failure to a system. A leak in either half of i di t d b th B k W i




g p gapplication. If the brake light turns on, it may

indicate that the parking brake is applied, thatthe brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem withthe anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has beendisengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on themaster cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brakehydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with theBrake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sys-tem. In this case, the light will remain on until thecondition has been corrected. If the problem is related to

indicated by the Brake Warning when the brake fluid level in dropped below a specified leve

The light will remain on until th

NOTE: The light may flash mocornering maneuvers, which ctions. The vehicle should havethe brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, imsary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on isdangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could havean accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

The light also will turn on whapplied with the ignition switch

NOTE: This light shows only applied. It does not show the de

3. Turn Signal IndicatorsThe arrow will flash with

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake ForceDistribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, theBrake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABSLight. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked byturning the ignition switch from the OFF position to theON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless

the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

when the turn signal lever

If the vehicle electronics sentraveled about 1 mile (1.6 km) wchime will sound to alert you teither indicator flashes at a defective outside light bulb.

4. High Beam Indicator Indicates that headlights

5. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part ofan onboard diagnostic system called OBD II thatmonitors engine and automatic transmission con-

trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is inthe ON position before engine start. If the bulb does notcome on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the

CAUTIO

Prolonged driving with thedamage to the engine controaffect fuel economy and driflashing, severe catalytic cpower loss will soon occur.




g ycondition checked promptly.

Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light afterengine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the lightstays on through several of your typical driving cycles. Inmost situations, the vehicle will drive normally and willnot require towing.

prequired.

WARNIN

A malfunctioning catalytic coabove, can reach higher tempeoperating conditions. This cdrive slowly or park over flamas dry plants or wood or card

result in death or serious injupants or others.

6. Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on for six toeight seconds as a bulb check when the ignitionswitch is first turned ON. If the light is not onduring starting, stays on, or turns on while

driving, have the system inspected by an authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

If the ABS Warning Light is on, be serviced as soon as possible anti-lock brakes. If the ABS Waron when the ignition switch is tuhave the light inspected by an a

8. Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



p

7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System.The light will turn on when the ignition switch is

turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long asfour seconds.

If the ABS Warning Light remains on or turns on whiledriving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service isrequired. However, the conventional brake system willcontinue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Lightis not on.

Indicates the engine speed in(RPM).

9. Vehicle Security Light This light will flash ra15 seconds when tharming. The light wilcontinuously after the

light will also come on for abouignition is first turned on.

10. Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure. Thelight should turn on momentarily when the engine

is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop thevehicle, and shut off the engine as soon as possible. Acontinuous chime will sound when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected

12. Tire Pressure Monitoring TeEach tire, including should be checked minflated to the inflation

by the vehicle manplacard or tire inflation pressuretires of a different size than th




Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.

The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

11. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light

If this indicator light flashes during accelera-tion, apply as little throttle as possible. Whiledriving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt yourspeed and driving to the prevailing road con-

ditions, and do not switch off the Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP), or Traction Control System (TCS).

vehicle placard or tire inflation p

determine the proper tire inflatioAs an added safety feature, equipped with a Tire Pressu(TPMS) that illuminates a low tione or more of your tires is signAccordingly, when the low tirenates, you should stop and chepossible, and inflate them to the on a significantly under-inflateoverheat and can lead to tire failreduces fuel efficiency and tire tthe vehicle’s handling and stopp

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for propertire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMSlow tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not

When the malfunction indicatotem may not be able to detect oras intended. TPMS malfunctionof reasons, including the instalalternate tires or wheels on theTPMS from functioning propTPMS malfunction telltale afte

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is

combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

tires or wheels on your veh

replacement or alternate tires anto continue to function properly

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the originalequipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures andwarning have been established for the tire sizeequipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-tion or sensor damage may result when using re-

The gauge pointer will likely inture when driving in hot weathor when towing a trailer. It shexceed the upper limits of the n

CAUTIO

Driving with a hot engine




placement equipment that is not of the same size,

type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can causesensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, orbalance beads if your vehicle is equipped with aTPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.

13. Temperature GaugeThe temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates thatthe engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

Driving with a hot engine damage your vehicle. If the te

240°F (116°C) or greater, puvehicle. Idle the vehicle witurned off until the pointernormal range 200–230°F (93–remains on the 240°F (116°C) ocontinuous chimes, turn the eand call an authorized dealer

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You orothers could be badly burned by steam or boilingcoolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If youdecide to look under the hood yourself, see Section 7

15. Electronic Stability ProgramLight/Brake Assist System (BAEquipped

The malfunction lightity Program (ESP) iAssist System (BAS)Warning Light” com

i h i d h “ON”

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



of this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cool-

ing System Pressure Cap paragraph.

14. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)DisplayWhen the appropriate conditions exist, this displayshows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-ter” later in this section.

switch is turned to the “ON” p

out with the engine running. IfLight” comes on continuously wmalfunction has been detectedBAS system. If this light remainscycles, and the vehicle has be(kilometers) at speeds greater than authorized dealer as soon as

WARNING!

If a warning light remains on the system may not beworking and you will not have the benefit of ESP orBAS. Under certain driving conditions, where ESP orBAS would be beneficial, you - if you have notadjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to

f h l k f h f b i id

17. Cruise Indicator This indicator illumintrol system is turned

18. Odometer The odometer shows the total been driven.

U S F d l l ti i




account for the lack of the feature, may be in accident.

16. Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON, thislight will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulbcheck. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat

belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulbcheck or when driving, if the driver or front passengerseat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Lightwill flash or remain on continuously. Refer to OccupantRestraints — Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System(BeltAlert) in Section 2 for more information.

U.S. Federal regulations requir

vehicle ownership, the seller cercorrect mileage that the vehicleodometer needs to be repairedtechnician should leave the odoas it was before the repair or servthen the odometer must be set a be placed in the door jamb stati before the repair or service. It make a record of the odometer r

service, so that you can be sure tthat the door jamb sticker is amust be reset at zero.

19. Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within theinstrument cluster. It displays the gear position of theautomatic transmission.

NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting fromPARK.

20 F l G

21. Electronic Throttle Control This light informs yoElectronic Throttle Coproblem is detected while the engine is ru

key when the vehicle has comshift lever is placed in the PA

h ld t ff If th li ht

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



20. Fuel Gauge

The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

should turn off. If the light rem

running, your vehicle will usuasee your authorized dealer for seIf the light is flashing when immediate service is required areduced performance, an elevatstall and your vehicle may requcome on when the ignition is firon briefly as a bulb check. If thduring starting, have the systerized dealer.

22. Front Fog Light Indicator — If EquippedThis indicator will illuminate when the front foglights are on.

23. Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg-ing system. The light should come on when the

ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly

If jump starting is required, Procedures” in section 6 of this

24. Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level reacheGallons (8.7 Liters) this remain on until fuel is

Warning Light may turn on a




g yas a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while

driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essentialelectrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). Ifthe charging system light remains on, it means that thevehicle is experiencing a problem with the chargingsystem. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-rized dealer.

g g yduring and after hard braking

This occurs due to the shifting

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER(EVIC)The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-tures a driver-interactive display that is located in theinstrument cluster.

The EVIC consists of the follow

• System Status

• Vehicle Information Warning

• Personal Settings (Customer-

• Compass Display

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



• Outside Temperature Display

• Trip Computer Functions

• Surround Sound Modes (IfSelectable Surround [DSS])

• Performance Pages (if equipp

Electronic Vehicle Information Center

The system allows the driver to select information bypressing the following buttons mounted on the steeringwheel:

MENU ButtonPress and release the MENU button and themode displayed will change between TripFunctions, Personal Settings, and System Sta-

COMPASS/TEMPERATURE BuPress and releaTEMPERATURE buttcompass readings and

Electronic Vehicle InformatioDisplaysWhen the appropriate condition




tus.

FUNCTION SELECT ButtonPress the FUNCTION SELECT button to selectthe displayed function (YES (Y) or NO (N).

SCROLL ButtonPress the SCROLL button to scroll through TripFunctions, Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features), and System StatusMessages.

When the appropriate condition

the following messages:• TURN SIGNAL ON

• PERFORM SERVICE

• DAMAGED KEY — KEY DCATE

• KEY NOT PROGRAMMEDGRAMMED

• WRONG KEY — KEY DOVEHICLE

• KEY NOT PROGRAMMED — EXCEEDED KEY PRO-GRAM LIMIT

• PROGRAMMING ACTIVE — NEW KEY PRO-GRAMMED

• SERVICE SECURITY KEY

• DRIVER/PASSENGER DOOR OPEN (with graphic)

• HOOD/DOORS OPEN (with• LIFTGATE/HOOD OPEN (w

• HOOD/GLASS/DOOR OPE

• HOOD/GLASS/DOORS OP

• HOOD/GATE/DOOR OPEN

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



•

LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN (with graphic)• X DOORS OPEN (with graphic)

• LIFTGATE OPEN (with graphic)

• LIFTGATE/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)

• LIFTGATE/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)

• LIFTGLASS OPEN (with graphic)

• HOOD OPEN (with graphic)

• HOOD/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)

• HOOD/GATE/DOORS OPE

• LIFTGLASS/DOOR OPEN (w

• LIFTGLASS/DOORS OPEN

• LIFTGLASS/HOOD OPEN (

• WASHER FLUID LOW (with

• COOLANT LOW (with grap

•

UPSHIFT (with graphic)• CHECK GAUGES

• AUTO HIGH BEAMS ON• AUTO HIGH BEAMS OFF

• PARK ASSIST DISABLED

• SERVICE SUSPENSION

• SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM

S SS O O

• MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLELED (with graphic)

• MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLEPARK

• DRIVER 1 MEMORY

• DRIVER 2 MEMORY




• TRANSMISSION OVER TEMP

• LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL

• WARNING! LIMIT SPEED

• CHECK GASCAP

• ESP OFF

• IOD FUSE OUT

•

MEMORY #1 POSITIONS SET• MEMORY #2 POSITIONS SET

•

ADJ. PEDALS DISABLED —• ADJ. PEDALS DISABLED —

• TIRE LOW PRESSURE

• CHECK TPM SYSTEM

• LEFT FRONT LOW PRESSUtem Only)

•

RIGHT FRONT LOW PRESSUtem Only)

•

LEFT REAR LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM SystemOnly)

• RIGHT REAR LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM Sys-tem Only)

• Stereo (if equipped with Driver-Selectable SurroundSound [DSS])

Vid S d (if i d i h D i S l bl

•

1/8 Mile (if equipped with P• 1/4 Mile (if equipped with P

• Instantaneous G-Force (if equPages)

• Peak G-Force (if equipped w

• RKE BATTERY LOW

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



• Video Surround (if equipped with Driver-Selectable

Surround Sound [DSS])

• Audio Surround (if equipped with Driver-SelectableSurround Sound [DSS])

• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) (if equipped with PerformancePages)

• Braking Distance (if equipped with PerformancePages)

RKE BATTERY LOW

• VEHICLE NOT IN PARK

• IGNITION POSITION

• PRESS BRAKE TO START

• INSERT KEY

• TURN TO ON

Trip FunctionsPress and release the MENU button until one of thefollowing Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:

• Distance To Empty

• Trip A

• Trip B

The Trip Functions mode displation:

• Distance To Empty (DTE)Shows the estimated distance tthe fuel remaining in the tank. Tdetermined by a weighted averand average fuel economy, accot k l l DTE t b t




• Elapsed Time

• Service Distance

• Engine Oil Pressure

• Engine Oil Temperature

• Display Units of Measure In

Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip

Computer functions.

tank level. DTE cannot be reset

SELECT button.

NOTE: Significant changes inloading will greatly affect the acthe vehicle, regardless of the DT

When the DTE value is less estimated driving distance, the to a LOW FUEL message. Th

until the vehicle runs out of fuamount of fuel to the vehicle FUEL message and a new DTE

•

Trip AShows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the lastreset.

• Trip BShows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the lastreset.

• Elapsed Time

•

Engine Oil TemperatureShows the current engine oil temread from 140° – 300°F (60° – 14

• Display Units of Measure InTo make your selection, pressTION SELECT button until “Eappears.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



pShows the total elapsed time of travel since the last resetwhen the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsedtime will increment when the ignition switch is in the ONor START position.

• Engine Oil PressureShows the current engine oil pressure. The scale will readfrom 0–100 psi (0–689 kPa).

To Reset The DisplayReset will only occur while a redisplayed. Press and release t button once to clear the resettplayed. To reset all resettable futhe FUNCTION SELECT buttondisplay will reset along with ot

Performance Pages — If Equipped

WARNING!

Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-mance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-roaduse only and should not be done on any publicroadways. It is recommended that these features be

d i t ll d i t d ithi th

•

1/8 Mile• 1/4 Mile

• Instantaneous G-Force

• Peak G-Force

To access, press and release tPerformance Pages displays i




used in a controlled environment and within the

limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle asmeasured by the performance pages must never beexploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, whichcan jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety ofothers. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver canprevent accidents.

The Performance Pages include the following features:

• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)

• Braking Distance

g p ySCROLL button to cycle througFUNCTION SELECT button to

The following describes each fe

0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)When selected, this screen dispthe vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mp10 seconds.

•

The feature will “ready” whe0 mph (0 km/h). The word “conditions are met for the ev

•

Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.

• The time will continue to display until the FUNCTIONSELECT button is pressed.

• Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear thecurrent run time and display the vehicle’s best0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time.

•

Engaging the parking brake • The word “READY” will fla

met for the event to begin.

• The distance and speed meathe event is taking place.

• The distance measurement wpedal is released before the

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



p

• To clear the vehicle’s best 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time,press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button forfive seconds.

Braking DistanceWhen selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s brakingdistance and the speed at which the brake pedal waspressed.

•

This feature will only function when applying the brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).

pedal is released before the

plete stop.

• The distance and speed measudisplay until the FUNCTIpressed.

• Pressing the FUNCTION SELcurrent run and prepare therun.

1/8 Mile, 1/4 MileWhen selected, this screen displays the time it takes thevehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) within 30 secondsand the vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/8 mile (1/4 mile).

• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condi-tions are met for the event to begin

•

To clear the vehicle’s best 1press and hold the FUNCTIfive seconds.

Instantaneous G-ForceWhen selected, this screen disp(longitudinal and lateral) along displays the directions of the fo




tions are met for the event to begin.

• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach1/8 mile (1/4 mile) in less then 30 seconds.

• The time and speed will continue to display until theFUNCTION SELECT button is pressed.

• Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear thecurrent run and display the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile(1/4 mile) run.

Peak G-ForceWhen selected, this screen dvalues (two longitudinal and tw

• When a force greater thandisplay will update the valG-Force falls, the peak forces

• Pressing the FUNCTION SELpeak force values.

Compass DisplayThe compass readings indicate the directionthe vehicle is facing. Press and release theCOMPASS/TEMPERATURE button to displayone of eight compass readings and the outside

temperature.

Automatic Compass CalibrationWhen the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic

1. Turn on the ignition switch.2. Press the MENU button (Customer-Programmable Featu

3. Press the SCROLL button untdisplayed in the EVIC.

4. Press and release the FUNCTstart the calibration The “CAL

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic

and the EVIC will display “CAL” until the compass iscalibrated. To complete the calibration process, driveslowly (5 mph/ 8 km/h) in one or more complete circlesin an area, free from magnetic material until the CALindicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The Compasswill now function normally.

Manual Compass CalibrationIf the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” indicator

does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put thecompass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:

start the calibration. The CAL

played in the EVIC.5. Complete one or more 360–free from large metal or metallicindicator turns off. The compnormally.

Compass VarianceCompass Variance is the diffe

North and Geographic Northcountry, the difference betwegraphic North is great enough

give false readings. For the most accurate compass per-formance, the compass variance must be set using thefollowing procedure:

NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away fromthe Overhead console. This is where the compass sensoris located.

1. Turn the ignition switch ON2. Press the MENU button (Customer-Programmable Featu

3. Press the SCROLL button untdisplayed in the EVIC.

4. Press and release the FUNCTchange the variance number.

b h d




number is reached.

5. Press either MENU, SCROL button to set the value and exit

Driver-Selectable Surround EquippedPress and release the MENU Sound” displays in the EVIC. Tmation on the current surround

• Stereo

• Audio SurroundCompass Variance Map

While in the Surround Sound menu, press the FUNC-TION SELECT button to change surround modes.

Personal Settings (Customer-ProgrammableFeatures)Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recallfeatures when the transmission is in PARK.

Press and release the MENU button until “PersonalSettings” displays in the EVIC

NOTE: The EVIC will not chaguage selection. Please refer to the uconnect™ phone section o

Auto Door LocksWhen YES (Y) is selected, allautomatically when the vehic15 mph (24 km/h). To make yrelease the FUNCTION SELECT

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



Settings displays in the EVIC.

Use the SCROLL button to display one of the followingchoices:

LanguageWhen in this display, you may select one of threelanguages for all display nomenclature, including the tripfunctions and the uconnect™ gps (if equipped). Press theFUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to

select English, Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you con-tinue, the information will display in the selected lan-guage.

release the FUNCTION SELECT

NO (N) appears.Auto Unlock On ExitWhen YES (Y) is selected, all owhen the vehicle is stopped, anthe PARK or NEUTRAL positioopened. To make your selectioFUNCTION SELECT button uappears.

Remote Key UnlockWhen “Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, only thedriver’s door will unlock on the first press of the RemoteKeyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When“Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, you must press theRKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock thepassenger’s doors. When “All Doors 1st Press” is se-lected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of theRKE t itt UNLOCK b tt T k l

Flash Lamps with LockWhen YES (Y) is selected, the frwill flash when the doors are locRKE transmitter. This feature without the “Sound Horn withyour selection, press and releaLECT button until YES (Y) or N

Headlamp Off Delay




RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selec-tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT buttonuntil “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press”appears.

Sound Horn with LockWhen YES (Y) is selected, a short horn sound will occurwhen the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. Thisfeature may be selected with or without the “Flash

Lamps with Lock” feature. To make your selection, pressand release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y)or NO (N) appears.

p y

When this feature is selected, thave the headlights remain on fowhen exiting the vehicle. To mand release the FUNCTION SE“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.

Auto High Beams (Available Only)When this feature is selected, th

will deactivate automatically unmake your selection, press and

SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears. Refer to“Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in Section 3 ofthis manual for more information.

Headlamps On with Wipers (Available withAutomatic Headlamps Only)When YES (Y) is selected, and the headlight switch is inthe AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The

the windshield. To make your sethe FUNCTION SELECT buttonappears. When NO (N) is selectthe standard intermittent wiper

Service IntervalWhen this feature is selected, a 2,000 miles (3 200 km) and 6,0500 miles (800 km) increments m

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



y p

headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turnedoff if they were turned on by this feature. To make yourselection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.

NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytimecauses the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3 of this manual.

Rain Sensing Wipers — If EquippedWhen YES (Y) is selected, the system will automaticallyactivate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on

( )

the STEP button when in this dis between 2,000 miles (3 200(10 000 km) in 500 miles (800 km

Reset Service Distance (DispInterval was Changed)When this feature is selected, tservice distance can be reset to tinterval. Press and release the F

ton until YES (Y) or NO (N) app

Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory SeatOnly)This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning toenhance driver mobility when entering and exiting thevehicle. To make your selection, press and release theFUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N)appears.

NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat

after the ignition switch is turnedoor will cancel this feature. Tpress and release the FUNCTIO“Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” or “1

Illuminated ApproachWhen this feature is selected, thand remain on for up to 90 secounlocked with the RKE transmi




location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is setto ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock thedoor. Refer to “Easy Entry/Exit Seat” under “DriverMemory Seat” in Section 3 of this manual for moreinformation.

Key Off Power DelayWhen this feature is selected, the power windowswitches, radio, uconnect™ phone (if equipped), DVD

video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes

tion, press and release the FUNuntil “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,

Display Units of Measure InThe EVIC, odometer, and uconcan be changed between Englmeasure. To make your selectioFUNCTION SELECT button unRIC” appears.

System StatusPress and release the MENU button until one of thefollowing System Status messages displays in the EVIC:

• System OK

• System Warnings Displayed (will display all currentlyactive System Warnings)

• Tire Pressure Monitor System (shows the current pres

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



• Tire Pressure Monitor System (shows the current pres-

sure of all four road tires). For additional information,refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor System” in Section 5 ofthis manual.

NOTE:• Tires heat up during normal

will cause the tire pressure to(14 to 41 kPa) during normal

to “Tires-General Informatsures” in Section 5 for additi

Tire Pressure D

•

Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,kPa, or BAR.

SALES CODE (RER/REN) — AM/FM/CD/DVDRADIO – IF EQUIPPED

NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right sideof the unit’s faceplate.

The REN and RER radios contain a CD/DVD player, USB

Operating Instructions — VoSystem (VR) — If EquippedRefer to “Voice Recognition uconnect™ User Manual locatedetails.

Operating Instructions — ucEquippedRefer to “uconnect™ phone”




/ p y ,

port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD). Sirius SatelliteRadio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allowsfor easy menu selection.

The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System(GPS)-based Navigation system.

Refer to your uconnect™ tunes (REN) or (RER) user’smanual for detailed operating instructions.

Manual located on the DVD forClock Setting Procedure

uconnect™ gps — RER onlyThe GPS receiver used in this sythe time data being transmittedsatellite clock is Greenwich Meaworldwide standard for time. clock very accurate once the apdaylight savings information is

To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN1. Turn on the radio.

2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.

3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed. Theclock setting menu will appear on the screen.

4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where theword “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-

6. To save the new time settingthe word “Save” is displayed.

Changing Daylight Savings TWhen selected, this feature will ddaylight savings time. Proceedcurrent setting:

1. Turn on the radio.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis

played. To move the hour backward, touch the screenwhere the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-ward is displayed.

5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen wherethe word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward isdisplayed. To move the minute backward, touch thescreen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointingdownward is displayed.

2. Touch the screen where theclock setting menu will appear

3. When this feature is on, a chthe box next to the words “Daylscreen where the words “Dayplayed to change the current se

Show Time if Radio is OffWhen selected, this feature will display the time of dayon the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceedas follows to change the current setting:


2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. Theclock setting menu will appear on the screen.

Changing the Time Zone


2. Touch the screen where theclock setting menu will appear

3. Touch the screen where the wdisplayed. The time zone selectthe screen.




3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear inthe box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio isOff” are displayed to change the current setting.

4. Select a time zone by touchinselection appears. If you do notwant to select, touch the screen wdisplayed to view additional tim

5. Touch the screen where the w

SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIOWITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower rightside of the radio faceplate.

Operating Instructions — Ra

NOTE: The ignition switch muposition to operate the radio.

Power Switch/Volume ControPush the ON/VOLUME contrradio. Push the ON/VOLUMEtime to turn off the radio.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



Electronic Volume ControlThe electronic volume control degrees) in either direction, withe ON/VOLUME control knobvolume, and to the left decrease

When the audio system is turnset at the same volume level as

RES Radio

SEEK ButtonsPress and release the SEEK buttons to search for the nextlistenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switchto seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radiowill remain tuned to the new station until you makeanother selection. Holding either button will bypassstations without stopping, until you release it.

TIME Button

4. Adjust the minutes using SCROLL control knob. Press theknob to save time change.

5. To exit, press any button/kn

RW/FFPressing the RW (Rewind) or Fcauses the tuner to search for tdirection of the arrows. This fe




Press the TIME button to alternate display of the timeand radio frequency.

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob.

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minuteswill begin to blink.

AM or FM frequencies.

TUNE ControlTurn the rotary TUNE/SCROLLto increase or counterclockwise t

Setting the Tone, Balance, anPush the rotary TUNE/SCROLLwill display. Turn the TUNE/S

the right or left to increase or d

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a secondtime and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLLcontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease themid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a thirdtime and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLLcontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease thetreble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLexit setting tone, balance, and f

AM/FM ButtonPress the buttons to select eithe

SET/RND Button — To Set thMemoryWhen you are receiving a stcommit to pushbutton memo

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourthtime and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust thesound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth timeand FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL controlknob to the left or right to adjust the sound level betweenthe front and rear speakers.

p

button. The symbol SET 1 will window. Select the button (1 to this station and press and releasis not selected within five secSET/RND button, the station wwill not be stored into pushbutt

You may add a second station to each pushbutton byrepeating the above procedure with this exception: Pressthe SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in thedisplay window. Each button can be set for SET 1 andSET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AMand 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected bypressing the pushbutton twice.

Operation Instructions — CDMP3 Audio Play

NOTE:• The ignition switch must b

position to operate the radio

• This radio is capable of playrecordable compact discs (CDdiscs (CD-RW), compact dis




Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons 1 - 6These buttons tune the radio to the stations that youcommit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FMstations).

DISC ButtonPressing the DISC button will allow you to switch fromAM/FM modes to Disc modes.

( ) p

multisession compact discs w

Inserting Compact Disc(s)Gently insert one CD into the label facing up. The CD will autthe CD player and the CD icoradio display. If a CD does not g1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may alreadejected before a new disc can be

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radioON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display willshow the track number, and index time in minutes andseconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION!

• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs

EJECT Button - Ejecting a CDPress the EJECT butto

If you have ejected a disc and ha10 seconds, it will be reloaded. Ithe radio will reinsert the CD b

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



only. The use of other sized discs may damage theCD player mechanism.

• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peelaway and jam the player mechanism.

• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to inserta second CD if one is already loaded.

• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, theother side is a CD) should not be used, and they

can cause damage to the player.

A disc can be ejected with the rNOTE: Ejecting with the igniticonvertible or soft-top models (

SEEK ButtonPress the right SEEK button forCD. Press the left SEEK button tof the current selection, or returprevious selection if the CD is w

the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks inCD and MP3 modes.

TIME ButtonPress this button to change the display from a large CDplaying time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FFPress and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD

SET/RND Button (Random PPress this button while the CDRandom Play. This feature placompact disc in random order tchange of pace.

Press the right SEEK button todomly selected track.

Press the RND button a secon




player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, orRW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.

AM/FM ButtonPress the button to select either AM or FM mode.

Play.

Notes on Playing MP3 FilesThe radio can play MP3 files; hfile recording media and formwriting MP3 files, pay attentiontions.

Supported Media (Disc Type

The MP3 file recording media suCDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, an

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.When reading discs recorded using formats other thanISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to readfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nor-mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of charact

• Level 1: 12 (including a secharacter extension)

• Level 2: 31 (including a secharacter extension)

Multisession disc formats are Multisession discs may containCD audio tracks and computer f

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



• Maximum number of folder levels: 8

• Maximum number of files: 255

• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of filenames and folder names is limited. For large numbers offiles and/or folders, the radio may be unable to displaythe file name and folder name, and will assign a numberinstead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20

folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceed-ing 50 folders will result in this display.)

p

Discs created with an option sucwriting are most likely multismultisession for CD audio or MPlonger disc loading times.

Supported MP3 File FormatsThe radio will recognize only fision as MP3 files. Non-MP3 fileextension may cause playbackdesigned to recognize the file asnot play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data toan MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in thefollowing table are supported. In addition, variable bitrates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 filesuse a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 orVBR bit rate.

MPEGSpecification

SamplingFrequency (kHz)

Bit Rate (kbps)

320, 256, 224,

Playlist files are not supportedsupported.

Playback of MP3 FilesWhen a medium containing Mradio checks all files on the mcontains a lot of folders or files,time to start playing the MP3 fi

Loading times for playback of M




MPEG-1 AudioLayer 3

48, 44.1, 32

, , ,192, 160, 128,

112, 96, 80, 64,56, 48, 40, 32

MPEG-2 AudioLayer 3

24, 22.05, 16

160, 128, 144,112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32, 24,16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title

are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is notsupported by the radios.

by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may CD-R media

• Medium formats - Multisessito load than non-multisessio

• Number of files and folderincrease with more files and

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommendedto use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create asingle-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc.

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary ModeThe auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, whichallows the user to plug in a portable device, such as anMP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s

NOTE: The AUX device musdevice’s volume set to proper lnot loud enough, turn the deviceaudio sounds distorted, turn th

TIME Button (Auxiliary ModPress this button to change the dtime of day will display for five OFF).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



audio system to amplify the source and play through thevehicle speakers.

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode toauxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

SALES CODE RES/RSC — AM/FM STEREO

RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) ANDSIRIUS RADIO

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower rightside of the radio faceplate.

Operating Instructions — Ra


Power Switch/Volume ControPush the ON/VOLUME contrradio. Push the ON/VOLUMEtime to turn off the radio.

Electronic Volume Control




The electronic volume control degrees) in either direction withON/VOLUME control knob tovolume and to the left decrease

When the audio system is turnset at the same volume level as

RES/RSC Radio

SEEK Buttons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the nextlistenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switchto seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radiowill remain tuned to the new station until you makeanother selection. Holding either button will bypassstations without stopping until you release it.

Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If EquippedRefer to “Voice Recognition (VR)” in the uconnect™ User

If your vehicle is not equipped wavailable on your vehicle, aUConnect” message will displa

Phone Button uconnect™ phPress this button to operate the u(if equipped). Refer to “ucouconnect™ User Manual locatedetails.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



g ( )Manual located on the DVD for further details.

Voice Recognition Button uconnect™ phone — IfEquippedPress this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Recognition (VR)” in theuconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for furtherdetails.

If your vehicle is not equipped wavailable on your vehicle, aUConnect” message will displa

TIME ButtonPress the TIME button to alterand radio frequency.

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob.

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minuteswill begin to blink.

starting at Step 2. For vehicles no

radio, press the SETUP button aprocedure, starting at Step 2.

INFO ButtonPress the INFO button for an Rletters displayed). The radio wmessage broadcast from an FM

RW/FF




4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL controlknob to save time change.

5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.

The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press theSETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select

SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or Fcauses the tuner to search for tdirection of the arrows. This feAM or FM frequencies.

TUNE ControlTurn the rotary TUNE/SCROLLto increase or counterclockwise t

Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASSwill display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob tothe right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a secondtime and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLLcontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease themid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL

and FADE will display. Turn theknob to the left or right to adjustthe front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLexit setting tone, balance, and f

MUSIC TYPE ButtonPressing this button once will

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a thirdtime and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLLcontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease thetreble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourthtime and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust thesound level from the right or left side speakers.

mode for five seconds. Pressing or turning the TUNE/SCROLL seconds will allow the progralected. Many radio stations doMusic Type information.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following

format types:

Program Type 16-Digit Character Display

No program type orundefined

None

Adult Hits Adlt Hit

Classical Classicl

Classic Rock Cls Rock

Program Type 16-D

Public

Rhythm and Blues

Religious Music

Religious Talk

Rock

Soft

Soft Rock




College CollegeCountry Country

Foreign Language Language

Information Inform

Jazz Jazz

News News

Nostalgia Nostalga

Oldies Oldies

Personality Persnlty

Soft Rhythm and Blues Sports

Talk

Top 40

Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon

is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequencystation with the same selected Music Type name. TheMusic Type function only operates when in the FMmode.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will beexited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

the minutes using the righ

control knob. Press the TUNEto save time change.

AM/FM ButtonPress the button to select either

SET/RND Button — To Set thMemoryWhen you are receiving a st

hb

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



SETUP ButtonPressing the SETUP button allows you to select betweenthe following items:

• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allowyou to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning theTUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting thehours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to setthe minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust

commit to pushbutton memo button. The symbol SET 1 will window. Select the button (1–6) ystation and press and release thnot selected within five secondRND button, the station will con be stored into pushbutton mem

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by

repeating the above procedure with this exception: Pressthe SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in thedisplay window. Each button can be set for SET 1 andSET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AMand 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected bypressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a correspondingb b ll d l

Operation Instructions — CD

MP3 Audio Play

NOTE:• The ignition switch must b

position to operate the radio

• This radio is capable of playrecordable compact discs (CDdiscs (CD-RW), compact dis

l i i di




button number will display.

Buttons 1 - 6These buttons tune the radio to the stations that youcommit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FMstations).

DISC/AUX ButtonPressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch

from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.

multisession compact discs wInserting Compact Disc(s)Gently insert one CD into the label facing up. The CD will autthe CD player and the CD icoradio display. If a CD does not g1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may alreadejected before a new disc can be

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio

ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display willshow the track number, and index time in minutes andseconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION!

• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discsonly. The use of other sized discs may damage the

l h

EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD

Press the EJECT butto

If you have ejected a disc and ha10 seconds, it will be reloaded. Ithe radio will reinsert the CD b

A disc can be ejected with the r

NOTE Ej i i h h i i i

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



CD player mechanism.

• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peelaway and jam the player mechanism.

• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to inserta second CD if one is already loaded.

• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, theother side is a CD) should not be used, and theycan cause damage to the player.

NOTE: Ejecting with the igniticonvertible or soft-top models (

SEEK ButtonPress the right SEEK button forCD. Press the left SEEK button tof the current selection, or returprevious selection if the CD is wthe current selection. Pressing

button will allow faster scrolliCD and MP3 modes.

TIME Button

Press this button to change the display from a large CDplaying time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FFPress and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW oranother CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) buttonworks in a similar manner.

AM/FM B tt

Press the SET/RND button a s

dom Play.

Notes On Playing MP3 FilesThe radio can play MP3 files; hfile recording media and formwriting MP3 files, pay attentiontions.

Supported Media (Disc Type

Th MP3 fil di di




AM/FM ButtonPress the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)Press this button while the CD is playing to activateRandom Play. This feature plays the selections on thecompact disc in random order to provide an interestingchange of pace.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-domly selected track.

The MP3 file recording media suCDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, an

Supported Medium Formats The medium formats supportedLevel 1 and Level 2 and incluWhen reading discs recorded uISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, thfiles properly and may be una

mally. UDF and Apple HFS form

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of folder levels: 8

• Maximum number of files: 255

• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of filenames and folder names is limited. For large numbersof files and/or folders, the radio may be unable todisplay the file name and folder name and will assigna number instead. With a maximum number of files,

di 20 f ld ill lt i thi di l With

Multisession disc formats are

Multisession discs may containCD audio tracks and computer fDiscs created with an option sucwriting are most likely multismultisession for CD audio or MPlonger disc loading times.

Supported MP3 File FormatsThe radio will recognize only fi

i MP3 fil N MP3 fil

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in thisdisplay.)

• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

• Level 1: 12 (including a separator . and a three-character extension)

• Level 2: 31 (including a separator . and a three-character extension)

sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 fileextension may cause playbackdesigned to recognize the file asnot play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder toan MP3 file, the bit rate and samfollowing table are supported. rates (VBR) are also supported. use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate aVBR bit rates.

MPEGSpecification

SamplingFrequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)

MPEG-1 AudioLayer 3

48, 44.1, 32

320, 256, 224,192, 160, 128,

112, 96, 80, 64,56, 48, 40, 32

MPEG-2 AudioLayer 3

24, 22.05, 16

160, 128, 144,112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32, 24,

16 8

Playback of MP3 Files

When a medium containing Mradio checks all files on the mcontains a lot of folders or files,time to start playing the MP3 fi

Loading times for playback of M by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may

CD R di




16, 8ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album titleare supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is notsupported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are notsupported.

CD-R media• Medium formats - Multisessi

to load than non-multisessio

• Number of files and folderincrease with more files and

To increase the speed of disc loato use CD-R media and single-s

single-session disc, enable the before writing to the disc.

LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folderson the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done byturning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting afolder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or thenext folder in sequence if the selection does not containplayable files).

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

Press and hold the INFO button

to return to elapsed time disp

Operation Instructions - AuxThe auxiliary (AUX) jack is anallows the user to plug in a poMP3 player or cassette player audio system to amplify the souvehicle speakers.

Pressing the AUX button will ch

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll throughthe following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, FileName, and Folder Name (if available).

Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsedtime priority mode.

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds ormore and the radio will display song titles for each file.

Pressing the AUX button will chiary device if the AUX jack is co

NOTE: The AUX device musdevice’s volume set to the propeis not loud enough, turn the deAUX audio sounds distorted, tdown.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)

Press this button to change the display to time of day. Thetime of day will display for five seconds (when theignition is OFF).

Operating Instructions - uconnect™ phone (IfEquipped)Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in the uconnect™ UserManual located on the DVD for further details.

Operating Instructions uconnect™ studios

UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INT

EQUIPPED

NOTE: This section is for salREL/RET radios only with ucoRER, REN, REP, REW or REZfeature, refer to the separate RManual. UCI is available only iwith these radios.

This feature allows you to p




Operating Instructions - uconnect™ studios(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)Refer to “uconnect™ studios (Satellite Radio)” in theuconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for furtherdetails.

This feature allows you to pvehicle’s sound system through the provided interface cable.

UCI supports Mini, 4G, PhotoiPhone devices. Some iPod sofully support the UCI featurwebsite for software updates.

NOTE:

• If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod to thisport does not play the media. For playing an iPod,use the separate 16–pin connector port (in the glovecompartment on some vehicles).

• Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in theradio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCIfeature to control the connected device.

Connecting The iPod

NOTE:

• You may have to remove the cap from the 16–pin connectoing the cable.

• If the iPod battery is compnot communicate with the Umum charge is attained. Leavto the UCI system may charg

Using This FeatureB i th id d

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



Connecting The iPodUse the provided connection cable to connect an iPod tothe vehicle’s 16–pin connector port (which is located inthe glove compartment on some vehicles). Once theiPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s UCIsystem (iPod may take a few seconds to connect), theiPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressingradio switches, as described below.

By using the provided conneciPod to the vehicle’s UCI 16–p

• The iPod audio can be playesystem, providing metadata etc.) information on the radio

• The iPod can be controlled uPlay, Browse, and List the iP

• The iPod battery charges whconnector (if supported by th

Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons

To get into the UCI (iPod) mode and access a connectediPod, press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate.Once in the UCI (iPod) mode, iPod audio tracks (ifavailable from iPod) start playing over the vehicle’saudio system.

Play ModeWhen switched to UCI mode, the iPod automaticallystarts Play mode. In Play mode, you may use the

following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the

jump to the previous track

button at any other time ithe beginning of the curre

• Jump backward in the currholding the << RW butto button long enough will taof the current track.

• Jump forward in the curren

holding the FF >> button




following buttons on the radio faceplate to control theiPod and display data:

• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next orprevious track.

• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, whileplaying a track, skips to the next track.

• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by oneclick, during the first two seconds of the track, will

holding the FF >> button.• A single press backward << R

jump backward or forwarseconds.

• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >previous or next track. If pressed during the first two se jump to the previous track in button at any other time in th

beginning of the track. If you press the SEEK >>

button during play mode, it will jump to the next trackin the list.

• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to seethe associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumpsto the next screen of data for that track. Once you haveseen all screens, the last INFO button press will takeyou back to the play mode screen on the radio.

P i h REPEAT b ill h h iP d

During Scan mode, you can

and SEEK >> buttons to seletracks.

• RND button (available on saPressing this button toggles bShuffle OFF modes for the iPshowing on the radio displayON.

List Or Browse ModeD i Pl d i

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPodmode to repeat the current playing track.

• Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode, whichwill play the first five seconds of each track in thecurrent list and then forward to the next song. To stopSCAN mode and start playing the desired track, whenit is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.

List Or Browse ModeDuring Play mode, pressing any below, takes you to List mode. scroll through the list of menus

• TUNE control knob: The TUNin a similar manner as the sc

• Turning it clockwise (forwwise (backward) scrolls thrthe track detail on the radio

the track to be played highlighted on the radio

display, press the TUNE control knob to select andstart playing the track. Turning the TUNE controlknob fast will scroll through the list faster. Duringfast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updatingthe information on the radio display.

• During all List modes, the iPod displays all lists in“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards

(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster

• Preset 5 - Audiobooks

• Preset 6 – Podcasts

• Pressing a PRESET buttonlist on the top line and thethe second line.

• To Exit List mode without ssame PRESET button agmode.

LIST b tt Th LIST b t




(counter clockwise) to get to the track faster.

• In List mode, the radio PRESET Buttons are used asshortcuts to the following lists on the iPod.

• Preset 1 – Playlists

• Preset 2 – Artists

• Preset 3 – Albums

• Preset 4 – Genres

• LIST button: The LIST butlevel menu of the iPod. Turnto list the top-menu item youthe TUNE control knob. Thsub-menu list item on the iPthe same steps to go to the dNot all iPod sub-menu levsystem.

• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is

another shortcut button to the genre listing on youriPod.

CAUTION!

• Leaving the iPod (or any supported device) any-where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold canalter the operation or damage the device. Followthe device manufacturer’s guidelines.

• Placing items on the iPod , or connections to the

uconnect™ studios (SATEL

EQUIPPED (REN/RER/RES RSatellite radio uses direct satelling technology to provide cleacoast. The subscription service pRadio. This service offers oversports, news, entertainment, andren, directly from its satellites a

NOTE: Sirius service is not ava

limited coverage in Alaska

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



Placing items on the iPod , or connections to theiPod in the vehicle, can cause damage to thedevice and/or to the connectors.

WARNING!

Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving.Failure to follow this warning could result in an

accident.

limited coverage in Alaska.

System ActivationSirius Satellite Radio service ismay begin listening immediatelyservice that is included with theradio system in your vehicle. Scome kit that contains generahow to setup your on-line listen

information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or

visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.

Electronic Serial Number/Sirius IdentificationNumber (ESN/SID)Please have the following information available whencalling:

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID).

Sirius ID number will display

display will time out in two minthe radio to exit this screen.

ESN/SID Access With REN/RWhile in SAT mode, press the Mfaceplate.

Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTIONAll the ESNs that apply to your

Selecting uconnect™ studio




Number (ESN/SID).2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

ESN/SID Access With RES RadiosWith the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scrollusing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is

selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the

Selecting uconnect studioPress the SAT button until SATCD may remain in the radio whmode.

Satellite AntennaTo ensure optimum reception, droof around the rooftop antennplaced within the line of sight odecreased performance. Larger

bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within

the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directlyon or above the antenna.

Reception QualitySatellite reception may be interrupted due to one of thefollowing reasons:

• The vehicle is parked in an underground parkingstructure or under a physical obstacle.

• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the

Operating Instructions - uco

(Satellite) Mode


SEEK ButtonsPress and release the SEEK buttchannel in Satellite mode. Pressup and the left switch to seek

remain tuned to the new channeselection Holding either butto

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in theform of short audio mutes.

• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings cancause intermittent reception.

• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna cancause signal blockage.

remain tuned to the new channeselection. Holding either buttowithout stopping until you rele

SCAN ButtonPressing the SCAN button causthe next channel, pausing for etinuing to the next. To stop the button a second time.

INFO Button

Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for anadditional three seconds will make the radio display theSong Title all of the time (press and hold again to returnto normal display).

RW/FFPressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons

causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the

MUSIC TYPE Button

Pressing this button once will mode for five seconds. Pressing or turning the TUNE/SCROLL seconds will allow the progralected.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE buttontype.

By pressing the SEEK buttonfunction is active the radio w




direction of the arrows.

TUNE Control (Rotary)Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwiseto increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.

y p gfunction is active, the radio wchannel with the same selected

If a preset button is activated w(Program Type) mode, the Muexited and the radio will tune t

SETUP Button

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select thefollowing items:

• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. Thisnumber is used to activate, deactivate, or change theSirius subscription.

SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a channel that you wish tocommit to pushbutton memory press the SET button

You may add a second channe

repeating the above procedure wthe SET button twice and SET 2window. Each button can be set allows a total of 12 Satellite chpushbutton memory. The chamemory can be selected by ptwice.

Every time a preset button is

button number will display.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



y g ycommit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channeland press and release that button. If a button is notselected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-ton, the channel will continue to play but will not bestored into pushbutton memory.

p y

Buttons 1 - 6These buttons tune the radio tcommit to pushbutton memory

Operating Instructions - ucoEquipped)Refer to “uconnect™ phone”

Manual located on the DVD for

KICKER HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM

WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) –IF EQUIPPEDYour vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audioamplifier that provides 5.1-channel surround sound fromany stereo audio source. Anew feature of the KICKER

audio system offers the ability to choose surround soundfor any audio source or video source.

“Video Surround” is optimized for rear-seat passengers

watching a video, and “Audio Surround” is optimizedf f f d Th

DSS modes for audio sources a

Surround,” which is surround front seat occupants. The “Videscribed under “KICKER MoPlease note that DSS effects are the original recording. Some auDSS modes, others in Stereo mo

When in “Audio Surround” mmatically. Fader control is ava

round audio if desired.




g , pfor front-seat passengers for any audio source. Thissurround effect is available for audio from any source –AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or Video / Video / AUX –and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle Informa-tion Center (EVIC). Refer to “Driver-Selectable SurroundSound (DSS)” under “Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC)”.

The removable subwoofer is larea, and is fastened in place uanchors, located on the left rear

Installing The Subwoofer

1. Lower the left rear passenger seat.

2. Align the left outside edge o

outside edge of the inner cargo

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



3. Slide the subwoofer toward the front of the vehicle so

that the rear edge lines up with the end of the load floor.

Removing The Subwoofer

1. Lower the left rear passenge




4. Connect the electrical connector.

5. Fold the left rear passenger seat rearward into theupright position. The rear tether anchors should engage

the hooks located on the back of the subwoofer.

2. Disconnect the electrical con

3. Remove the subwoofer.

uconnect™ studios (SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV™) —

IF EQUIPPEDSatellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcastingtechnology to provide streaming video. The subscriptionservice provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio. SIRIUS Back-seat TV™ offers three video channels for family enter-tainment, directly from its satellites and broadcastingstudios.

NOTE: SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii or

Canada and has limited coverage in Alaska.

screen, a battery-powered remo

sets. Refer to the “uconnectuconnect™ User Manual locatedetails.

The LCD screen is located on tfront seats.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



Refer to your Video Entertainment System (VES)™, RERNavigation or REN Multimedia User Manuals for de-tailed operating instructions.

VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM™ (SALESCODE XRV) — IF EQUIPPEDThe optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) con-

sists of a DVD player and LCD (liquid crystal display) Lowering the Disp

Kicker Mobile Surround (K

The VES™ for this vehicle comMobile Surround (KMS1). Thmate movie experience by prouniquely equalized for the inter

The KMS1 Video Surround movideo source is selected, unless“Audio Surround” mode. DSS are “Stereo,” “Audio Surround,

When in Video Surround modeautomatically by the KMS1




automatically by the KMS1ultimate surround sound experRemote Control Location

REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPEDThe remote sound system controls are located on the rearsurface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel toaccess the switches.

The right-hand control is a ro

pushbutton in the center and cmode of the sound system. Presswitch will increase the volume,of the rocker switch will decrea

Pressing the center button wil between the various modes avCD, etc.).

The left-hand control is a rocpushbutton in the center. The f

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



control is different depending on

The following describes the left-each mode.

Radio OperationPressing the top of the switch wlistenable station and pressing

will “Seek” down for the next li

Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering

Wheel)

The button located in the center of the left-hand control

will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.

CD PlayerPressing the top of the switch once will go to the nexttrack on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch oncewill go to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one secondafter the current track begins to play.

If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the

CD/DVD MAINTENANCE

To keep a CD/DVD in good conprecautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edsurface.

2. If the disc is stained, clean thewiping from center to edge.

3. Do not apply paper or tape t

ing the disc.




second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.

The center button on the left side rocker switch has nofunction for a single-disc CD player. However, when amultiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, thecenter button will select the next available CD in theplayer.

4. Do not use solvents such as bor anti-static sprays.

5. Store the disc in its case after

6. Do not expose the disc to dir

7. Do not store the disc where te

too high.

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-

lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflectivecoating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a knowngood disc before considering disc player service.

RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONESUnder certain conditions, the cellular phone being on inyour vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance fromyour radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated

by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This conditionis not harmful to the radio If our radio performance

CLIMATE CONTROLS

Automatic Temperature ConThe Automatic Temperature Ccally maintains the interior comdriver and passenger.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performancedoes not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of theantenna, it is recommended that the radio volume beturned down or off during cellular phone operation.

Automatic Tempera

NOTE: The numbers on the temperature dial represent

a comfort setting when the Mode knob is set to AUTO,and not the actual air temperature.

Turn the mode control (on the right) knob to AUTO, andthen turn the blower control (on the left) knob to eitherLO AUTO or HI AUTO. The LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occupants only. The HI AUTOposition should be used when more airflow is desired, orwhen rear seat occupants are present. Dial in the comfort

setting you would like the system to maintain by rotatingthe driver’s or passenger’s control knob. Once the com-

You will experience the great

allowing the system to functionthe OFF (O) position on the blowsystem completely.

NOTE: The temperature settintime without affecting automaticever, if the driver and/or passeare set to the full hot or fulltemperature out of the ducts w

respectively. With the temperattions, the system does not atte




the driver s or passenger s control knob. Once the comfort level is selected, the system will maintain that levelautomatically using the heating system. Should the de-sired comfort level require air conditioning, the systemwill automatically make the adjustment.

tions, the system does not attecontrol.

The air conditiontomatic. PressingAUTO mode wilthree times and r

that the system is in AUTO

conditioning is not necessary.

AirConditioning

The system will automatically control re-

circulation. However, pressing this buttonwill temporarily put the system in “Recir-culation” mode. This can be used whenoutside conditions such as smoke, odors,

dust, or high humidity are present. This will cause theLED to illuminate.

NOTE:• The surface of the climate control panel, and the top

center of the instrument panel should be kept free ofdebris due to the climate control sensor’s location.

• Under certain conditions (af

off) the climate control systenoise may be heard for 20 normal operation.

• Most of the time, when in Acan temporarily put the symode by pressing the “Reciever, under certain conditionis blowing air out of the de

conditions are present, and this pressed, the indicator will f

Recirculation

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



debris due to the climate control sensor s location.Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operationof this system.

• To provide you with maximum comfort in the auto-matic mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan willremain off until the engine warms up. However, thefan will engage immediately if the defrost mode is

selected or if you manually select a blower speed.

is pressed, the indicator will ftells you that you are unablemode at this time. If you woulation mode, you must first mPanel, Panel/Floor, or Floor,lation” button. This feature wof window fogging.

Manual Operation

This system offers a full complement of manual overridefeatures which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,Mode Preferred Automatic with Manual Air TemperatureControl, and Manual. This means the customer canoverride the blower, mode, and disable the AutomaticTemperature Control completely.

NOTE:•

For vehicles equipped with Rcontrols will not function dution if the blower control position.

• Please read the Automatic Teration Chart below for deta




UNDERSTANDING YOUR



NOTE: Regardless of the type of operation, when a

temperature knob is set to the full clockwise or fullcounterclockwise position, the system will deliver fullhot or full cold air out of the ducts, respectively.

The operator can override the AUTO mode setting andselect the direction of the air by rotating the right modeknob to one of the following positions. When the Mode isset to any position other than AUTO, the automaticcontrol of air temperature is disabled. The user must

adjust the temperature knobs to obtain the desired tem-perature.

NOTE: The defrost mode is no

It must be manually selected, wDefrost/Floor

Air flows through the froand the outlets at the basealso directed to the front d

side window demister grilles. Sto the floor while in defrost maintained.

Floor Air flows through the flo




p

Defrost Air is directed to the windshield through theoutlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also

directed to the front door windows through the sidewindow demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered to thefloor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained.

Air flows through the flothe instrument panel and

through vents under the frondelivered to defrost while in flocan be maintained.

Bi-Level

Air flows both through the outlets located in theinstrument panel and those located on the floor. Airflows through the registers in the back of the centerconsole, and under the front seats to the rear seatpassengers. These registers can be closed to block airflow.The center console outlets deliver conditioned air whilethe floor outlets deliver heated air.

Panel

Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-ment panel. Air flows through the registers in the

Air Conditioning

Press this button to turnand off during manualtioned outside air is th

outlets selected on the mode cincludes an LED that illuminateis selected.

NOTE: To manually control tmode selector must be moved o

RecirculationThis button can be u

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



back of the center console to the rear seat passengers.These registers can be closed to block airflow.

This button can be uodors, dust, high humis desired. The “Recionly be used tempora

an LED that illuminates, which culation” mode is active. Youseparately.

NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the

windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins tofog, press the “Recirculate” button to return to outsideair. Some temperature/humidity conditions will causecaptured interior air to condense on windows and ham-per visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow“Recirculation” mode to be selected while in the defrostor defrost/floor modes. Attempting to use Recirculationwhile in these modes will cause the LED in the button to blink and then turn off.

Operating Tips

button) on will clear the fog.

control, air direction, and blocomfort.

As the temperature gets colderdirect air onto the windshield.control and blower speed to m blower speeds will reduce foggthe windshield can be quickly rdefrost mode.

Regular cleaning of the insidenon-filming cleaning solution (v




Window FoggingWindows will fog on the inside when the humidity insidethe vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cooltemperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases,turning the air conditioning (pressing the snowflake

non-filming cleaning solution (vvery well) will help prevent smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sContaminates increase the rate

Summer Operation

Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a highquality antifreeze coolant, during the summer, to provideproper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling pointof the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50 %concentration is recommended. Refer to RecommendedFluids and Genuine Parts for the proper coolant type.

When using the air conditioner in extremely heavytraffic, in hot weather, especially when towing a trailer,

additional engine cooling may be required. If this situa-tion is encountered, operate the transmission in a lower

Your air conditioning system i

automatic recirculation system.a heavy load or high heat condRecirculation A/C mode to pro

Winter OperationWhen operating the system dumake sure the air intake, locatewindshield, is free of ice, obstructions.

Vacation StorageAnytime you store your vehicle

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



gear to increase engine RPM, coolant flow and fan speed.When stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary toshift into NEUTRAL (N) and depress the acceleratorslightly for fast idle operation to increase coolant flowand fan speed.

Anytime you store your vehicle(i.e. vacation) for two weeks ortioning system at idle for aboutair and high blower setting. Thsystem lubrication to minimizepressor damage when the syste

Operating Tips Chart




STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

▫ Extreme Cold Weather(Below 20°F Or 29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

▫ Brake/Transmission InterloOverride . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Five–Speed Automatic Tran

▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . .



▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

▫Brake/Transmission Shift InterlockSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

▫ Rocking The Vehicle . . . .

AutoStick . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ AutoStick Operation . . .

▫ General Information . . . .

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 254

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 254

▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 255

▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Tire Safety Information . . .

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . .

▫ Tire Identification Number

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pres

Tires — General Information

▫ Run Flat Tires . . . . . . . . .

▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . .

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . .

236 STARTING AND OPERATING



▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . 256

▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . 257

▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

▫ ESP/BAS Warning Light And ESP/TCSIndicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

▫ Tire Pressures For High Sp

▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . .

▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . .

▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . .

▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 277

▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277


Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

▫ 6.1L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warning

Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Common Towing Definitio

▫ Trailer Hitch Classification

▫ Trailer Towing Weights

(Maximum Trailer Weight R

▫ Trailer And Trailer Tongue

START



▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 282

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

▫ Trailer And Trailer Tongue

▫ Towing Requirements . . .

▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . .

Recreational Towing(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . .

STARTING PROCEDUREBefore starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust theinside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and ifpresent, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.

WARNING!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leavingunattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key inthe ignition A child could operate power win

Normal Starting

Tip Start

NOTE: Normal starting of eengine is obtained without puaccelerator pedal.

Do not press the accelerator. UsKey to briefly turn the ignitioposition and release it as soon a

starter motor will continue to rautomatically when the enginefails to start the starter will dis




the ignition. A child could operate power win-dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

• Do not leave animals or children inside parkedvehicles in hot weather; interior heat buildup maycause serious injury or death.

fails to start, the starter will dis10 seconds. If this occurs, turn tLOCK position, wait 10 to 15 s“Normal Starting” procedure.

Extreme Cold Weather (Below 20°F or 29°C)To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use ofan externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING!

• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids intothe throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to

start the vehicle. This could result in a flash firecausing serious personal injury.

WARNING! (C

• Do not attempt to push or tit started. Vehicles equipptransmission cannot be starfuel could enter the catalythe engine has started, igconverter and vehicle. If charged battery, booster cobtain a start from a booste

in another vehicle. This tygerous if done improperly

j t ti

START



g p j y

(Continued)proper jump-starting procecarefully.

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, pushthe accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position andrelease it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motorwill disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once thisoccurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, thenrepeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

CAUTION!

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

CAUTIO

Damage to the transmission ming precautions are not obser

• Shift into PARK only after a complete stop.

• Shift into or out of REVvehicle has come to a compl

is at idle speed.• Do not shift from REVERS

i t f d h




To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 sec-onds before trying again.

After StartingThe idle speed is controlled automatically and it willdecrease as the engine warms up.

into any forward gear wheidle speed.

• Before shifting into any geis firmly on the brake peda

WARNING!

It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK orNEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idlespeed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or inreverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hitsomeone or something. Only shift into gear when theengine is idling normally and when your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal.

Key Ignition Park Interlock

Brake/Transmission Shift IntThis vehicle is equipped with a Interlock System (BTSI) that hoPARK position when the ignitioposition. To move the shift lposition, the ignition switch muswitch position (ACC, ON, or STnot) and the brake pedal must b

Brake/Transmission Interloc

Your vehicle may be equipped override. The manual override mthat the shift lever should fail to

START



This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARKprior to rotating the key to the LOCK position. The keycan only be removed from the ignition when the ignitionis in the LOCK position and once removed the shift leveris locked in PARK.

that the shift lever should fail tothe key in the ON position and To operate the shift lock manufollowing steps:

1. Turn the key to the ON posiengine.

2. Firmly set the parking brake

3. Using a flat blade screwdriver, carefully remove theshift lock manual override cover which is located on thePRNDL bezel.

4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

5. Using the screwdriver, reach into the manual overrideopening. Press and hold the shift lock lever down.

6. Move the shift lever into the

7. The vehicle may then be starHave your vehicle inspected bdealer, if the shift lock manual

Five–Speed Automatic TransThe electronically controlled tprecise shift schedule. The tranself-calibrating; therefore, the f

vehicle, may be somewhat abcondition, and precision shifts whundred miles/kilometers.




hundred miles/kilometers.

Interlock Manual Override

WARNING!

It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK orNEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idlespeed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or inreverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hitsomeone or something. Only shift into gear when theengine is idling normally and when your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal.

Gear Ranges

NOTE: After selecting any gearallow the selected gear to engThis is especially important whthere is a need to restart the enkey to the LOCK position beforegear engagement may be delaengine if the key is not cycled to

PARK

This range supplements the partransmission. The engine can N PARK hil th h

START



Never use PARK while the vehthe parking brake when leavingAlways apply the parking brakelever into the PARK position.

WARNING!

Unintended movement of a vehicle could injurethose in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,you should never exit a vehicle while the engine isrunning. Before exiting a vehicle, you should applythe park brake, shift the transmission into PARK,and remove the key from the ignition. Once the keyis removed from the ignition, the shift lever is lockedin the PARK position, securing the vehicle against

unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should neverleave children unattended inside a vehicle.

NEUTRALThis range is used when vehilonged periods with engine rstarted in this range. Set the paleave the vehicle.

DRIVEThis range is used only when thstop and the brakes are firmly aautomatically upshifts throughposition provides optimum drivall normal operating conditionsinformation, refer to “Autostick




REVERSEThis range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use onlyafter the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

,

Rocking the VehicleIf the vehicle becomes stuck in snoften be moved by a rocking mo between DRIVE and REVERSpressure to the accelerator.

NOTE: The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) andTraction Control (if equipped) should be turned OFF

before attempting to rock the vehicle. Refer to “ElectronicBrake Control System” in Section 5 of this manual.

The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main-tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels orracing the engine is most effective. Racing the engine orspinning the wheels, due to the frustration of not freeingthe vehicle, may lead to transmission overheating andfailure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever inNEUTRAL for at least one minute after every fiverocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating

CAUTIO

When “rocking” a stuck vehicDRIVE and REVERSE, do notthan 15 mph (24 km/h), or dresult.

AUTOSTICKAutostick is a driver-interactivmanual gear shifting capabilit

with more control. Autostickcrease engine braking ability, co

START



g y gand reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

shift points, and enhance the dsystem can also provide the dduring passing, city driving, mtowing, and many other situatio

Autostick OperationBy placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position, the shift

lever can be moved from side to side. This allows thedriver to engage the AutoStick mode. Moving the shiftlever to the right (+) or the left (-) will engage theAutostick mode. In normal driving mode (Boxed “D”displayed in the PRNDL), moving the shift lever to theright (+) will engage the Autostick mode putting thetransmission in the currently engaged gear. Moving theshift lever to the Left (-) will engage the Autostick mode

and downshift the transmission 1 gear. For example, thetransmission is in Normal Mode and is currently operat-ing in 3rd gear a boxed D is displayed in the PRNDL a

Once Autostick mode is engageor left (-) will trigger a upshift (

(-).

NOTE: In the Autostick modshift up and down when left orally selected by the driver.

The transmission will not alldownshift would result in an etion. The transmission will alw

1st to 2nd gear, however 2nd - 3rupshifts will not be allowed if low to maintain operation in




ing in 3rd gear, a boxed D is displayed in the PRNDL, apush to the right will engage the Autostick mode in 3rdand a Boxed 3 will be displayed in the PRNDL. A push tothe left (-) will engage Autostick mode and downshift to2nd gear and a Boxed 2 will be displayed in the PRNDL.

low to maintain operation intransmission will automaticallyslows to a stop (to prevent endisplay the current gear. After manually upshift (D+) the transaccelerated.

When in the Autostick mode, as the engine RPM nearsthe engine maximum speed, an “UPSHIFT” message will

appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) portion of your instrument cluster. This messageappears in order to alert the driver that the engine speedis approaching it’s maximum value and a upshift to thenext gear is required. In the event that the driver does notupshift, the engine control system will automatically do itfor the driver. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter” in Section 4 of this manual.

Shifting into or out of the Autostick mode can be doneat any time without taking your foot off the accelerator

General Information

•

You can start out in first or will ignore attempts to upshspeed.

• The transmission will automagear when coming to a stop. Tthe D+ position (at a stop) wgear. After starting, the drmanually upshift (D+) as the

• Starting out in second gear iconditions.

START



pedal. When the driver wishes to engage Autostick,simply move the shift lever to the left or right (D-/D+)position while in DRIVE.

Hold the shift lever to the right for at least one second todisengage Autostick. The transmission will now operate

automatically; shifting between the five available gears.

• Avoid using speed control gaged.

• The transmission will autommaximum engine speed is reaengaged.

• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable whenAutostick is engaged.

POWER STEERINGThe standard power steering system will give you goodvehicle response and increased ease of maneuverabilityin tight spaces. The system will provide mechanicalsteering capability if power assist is lost.

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it willstill be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-

tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steeringeffort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during

ki

due to the cold, thick fluid in tnoise should be considered norm

way damage the steering system

WARNIN

Continued operation with reassist could pose a safety riskService should be obtained a

CAUTIOProlonged operation of the ste




parking maneuvers.

NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steeringwheel travel are considered normal and do not indicatethat there is a problem with the power steering system.

Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering

pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is

of the steering wheel travel wfluid temperature and it shopossible. Damage to the powoccur.

Power Steering Fluid CheckThe power steering system requires the use of MOPAR

Hydraulic System Power Steering Fluid or equivalent,which meets Chrysler Material Standard MS-10838.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your power steeringsystem as the chemicals can damage your powersteering components. Such damage is not covered bythe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!

Checking the power steering service interval is not required.

checked if a leak is suspecteapparent, and/or the system is pated. Coordinate inspection erized dealer.

WARNIN

Fluid level should be checkedwith the engine off to prevenparts and to ensure accurate fnot overfill. Use only manuf

START



WARNING!

Do not use Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), orother types of power steering fluids, when servicingthe power steering system of this vehicle. Damage tothe power steering system can result from the use ofthe wrong power steering fluid.

power steering fluid.

If necessary, add fluid to restorlevel. With a clean cloth, wipe asurfaces.

PARKING BRAKETo set the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as

possible. When the parking brake is applied with theignition ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instru-ment cluster will light. To release the parking brake, pullup slightly, press the center button, then lower the levercompletely.

NOTE: The instrument cluster “Brake Warning Light”indicates only that the parking brake is applied. It doesnot indicate the degree of brake application.

Parking Br




Be sure the parking brake is firmthe shift lever is in the PARK poa hill, you should apply the parkthe shift lever in PARK, othtransmission locking mechanism

move the shift lever out of PAR

g

WARNING!

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damageor injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmissionin PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle toroll and cause damage or injury.

• Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan-gerous for a number of reasons. A child or otherscould be injured. Children should be warned not

to touch the parking brake or the shift lever. Donot leave the key in the ignition. A child couldoperate power windows other controls or move

When parking on a hill, turn thecurb on a downhill grade and a

uphill grade.

The parking brake should alwathe driver is not in the vehicle.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMThe Anti-Lock Brake System (Adriver in maintaining vehicle braking conditions. The system

computer to modulate hydrauwheel lock-up and help avoisurfaces

START



operate power windows, other controls, or movethe vehicle.

• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengagedbefore driving, failure to do so can lead to brakeproblems due to excessive heating of the rearbrakes.

surfaces.

All vehicle wheels and tires mutype and tires must be propeaccurate signals for the comput

WARNING!

Significant over or under inflation of tires can lead toloss of braking effectiveness.

The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low-speed self-test at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your footlightly on the brake while this test is occurring you mayfeel slight pedal movement. The movement can be moreapparent on ice and snow. This is normal.

The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runs duringthe self-test at 12 mph (20 km/h) and during an ABS stop.Th t k l h i i d i

WARNIN

• Pumping of the Anti-Locktheir effectiveness and maPumping makes the stoppinpress firmly on your braketo slow down or stop.

• The Anti-Lock Brake Systemthe natural laws of physivehicle, nor can it increas

efficiency beyond that affoof the vehicle brakes andafforded.




The pump motor makes a low humming noise duringoperation, which is normal.

afforded.

• The ABS cannot preventthose resulting from excefollowing another vehicle planing. Only a safe, attentcan prevent accidents.


• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle mustnever be exploited in a reckless or dangerousmanner which could jeopardize the user’s safetyor the safety of others.

CAUTION!

The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possible

detrimental effects of electronic interference causedby improperly installed after-market radios or tele-phones.

WARNIN

To use your brakes and acfollow these tips:

• Do not “ride” the brakes bthe pedal. This could ovresult in unpredictable bstopping distances, or brak

• When descending mountabraking can cause brake fa

control. Avoid repeated heshifting the transmission owhenever possible

START



NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsingsensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard.This is normal, indicating that the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem is functioning.

whenever possible.

• Engines may idle at higheup, which could cause reresult in loss of vehicle careful while driving on slquarter maneuvering, park


•

Do not drive too fast for road conditions, espe-cially when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge ofwater can build up between the tire tread and theroad. This hydroplaning action can cause loss oftraction, braking ability, and control.

• After going through deep water or a car wash,brakes may become wet, resulting in decreasedperformance and unpredictable braking action.

Dry the brakes by gentle, intermittent pedal actionwhile driving at very slow speeds.

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTYour vehicle is equipped with

brake control system that includtem (ABS), Traction Control SySystem (BAS), Electronic Roll Electronic Stability Program (systems work together to enhacontrol in various driving cond

Also, your vehicle is equipped w(TSC).

Anti-Lock Brake System (AB

This system aids the driver in m




This system aids the driver in munder adverse braking conditiohydraulic brake pressure to prehelp avoid skidding on slipperyRefer to “Anti-Lock Brake Systmanual for more information ab

WARNING!

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot preventthe natural laws of physics from acting on the ve-hicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded byprevailing road conditions. ABS cannot prevent acci-dents, including those resulting from excessive speedin turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver canprevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS-

equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize theuser’s safety or the safety of others.

stability. A feature of the TCS sya limited slip differential and

across a driven axle. If one wspinning faster than the other, t brake of the spinning wheel. Thtorque to be applied to the whThis feature remains active even“ESP Partial Off” mode. ReferProgram (ESP)” in this section f

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimicapability during emergency bsystem detects an emergency b

START



y y

Traction Control System (TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each ofthe driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brakepressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine

power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and

system detects an emergency bing the rate and amount of braapplies optimum pressure to threduce braking distances. Theanti-lock brake system (ABS). Aquickly results in the best BAS a

benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not

“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressureunless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedalis released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent thenatural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing

road conditions. BAS cannot prevent accidents, in-cluding those resulting from excessive speed inturns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro

Electronic Roll Mitigation (EThis system anticipates the po

monitoring the driver’s steerispeed of the vehicle. When ERMof change of the steering wheel are sufficient to potentially capplies the appropriate brakeengine power to lessen the choccur. ERM will only intervenevasive driving maneuvers.

ERM can only reduce the chancduring severe or evasive drivinprevent wheel lift due to oth




turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver canprevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize theuser’s safety or the safety of others.

prevent wheel lift due to othconditions, leaving the roadwother vehicles.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-tions and driving conditions, influence the chancethat wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannotprevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially thosethat involve leaving the roadway or striking objectsor other vehicles. Only a safe, attentive, and skillfuldriver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of anERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a

reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar-dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

the brake of the appropriate wacting the over/under steer c

may also be reduced to help tdesired path.

ESP uses sensors in the vehicle path intended by the driver andpath of the vehicle. When the acthe intended path, ESP applies tate wheel to assist in counterundersteer condition.

• Oversteer - when the vehicappropriate for the steering w

START



Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

This system enhances directional control and stability ofthe vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP cor-rects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying

• Understeer - when the vehappropriate for the steering w

The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light”will start to flash as soon as the tESP system becomes active. T

Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCSIndicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease

up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle aspossible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to theprevailing road conditions.

WARNING!

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) cannot pre-vent the natural laws of physics from acting on thevehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by

prevailing road conditions. ESP cannot prevent acci-dents, including those resulting from excessive speedin turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro-

The ESP system has two availab

OnThis is the normal operating movehicle is started, the ESP systmode. This mode should be situations. ESP should only bemode for specific reasons as no

Partial Off This mode is entered by momen

OFF” switch. When in “Partiportion of ESP, except for thdescribed in the TCS section, h“ESP/TCS I di Li h ” ill




in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver canprevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize theuser’s safety or the safety of others.

“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” willstability features of ESP functiointended to be used if the vehicor gravel conditions and morwould normally allow is requ

turn ESP on again, momentarily press the ESP OFF”switch. This will restore the normal “ESP On” mode of

operation.

Off” mode by pressing the “ESsituation requiring ESP to be sw

Off” mode is overcome, turn Etarily pressing the “ESP OFF” swhile the vehicle is in motion.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)TSC uses sensors in the vehiclsively swaying trailer and wactions to attempt to stop thereduce engine power and apply

priate wheel(s) to counteract thewill become active automaticaswaying trailer is recognized.

START



NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when drivingwith snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or

gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “ESP Partial

s ay g t a e s ecog edquired. Note that TSC cannoswaying. Always use caution wfollow the tongue weight rec“Trailer Towing” in Section 5 information on towing a trailer

TSC is functioning, the “ESP/T

ESP OFF Switch

flash, the engine power may be reduced and you mayfeel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to

attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabledwhen the ESP system is in the “Partial Off” mode.

WARNING!

If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicledown, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust thetrailer load to eliminate trailer sway.

ESP/BAS Warning Light and ESP/TCS IndicatorLight

The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is

If the “ESP/BAS Wacontinuously with th

function has been detethe BAS system, or bot

after several ignition cycles, adriven several miles at speed(48 km/h), see your authorized dto have the problem diagnosed

NOTE:• The “ESP/TCS Indicator Li

Warning Light” come on moignition switch is turned ON

E h ti th i iti i t




pcombined with the BAS indicator. The “ESP/BAS Warning Light” and the “ESP/TCS Indi-cator Light” in the instrument cluster both

come on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position. They should both go out with the engine

running.

• Each time the ignition is turnwill be ON even if it was turn

• The ESP Control System will sounds when it is active. Thwill stop when ESP become

maneuver that caused the ES

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

NOTE:• P (Passenger) - Metric tire

design standards. P-Metric molded into the sidewall pretion. Example: P215/65R15 9

• European-Metric tire sizingdesign standards. Tires desigthe tire size molded into the the section width. The letter size designation. Example: 21

• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tirdesign standards. The size dtires is the same as for P M

START



tires is the same as for P-Mletters “LT” that are molded ing the size designation. Exam1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-

dards Code (TIN)4 — Maximum Load

2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades

• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compactspares designed for temporary emergency use only.

Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

• High flotation tire sizing istandards and it begins with

into the sidewall. Example: 3




Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Size Designation:

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standardsLT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standardsT = Temporary spare tire31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)— Ratio of section height to section width of tire10.5 = Section width in inches (in)R Construction code

START



R = Construction code— R means radial construction—D means diagonal or bias construction

15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

EXAMPLE:

Service Description:

95 = Load Index— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can ca

H = Speed Symbol— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry to its load index under certain operating conditions— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, roaposted speed limits)

Load Identification:....blank.... = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a StandaExtra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire




Light Load = Light load tireC, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a s

Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to cMaximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire ithis tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN)The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,

however, the date code may only be on one side. Tireswith white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including thedate code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboatires as mounted on the vehicle.

the outboard side, then you wside of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Departmensafety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)03 N b i h k i hi h h i f d ( di i )

START



03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)—03 means the 3rd week.

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)—01 means the year 2001— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one num

year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3r

Tire Loading and Tire Pressure

Tire Placard Location

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listedon the driver’s side B-Pillar.

Tire and Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you importanthe:

1) number of people that can b2) total weight your vehicle can

3) tire size designed for your v

4) cold tire inflation pressures spare tires.

LoadingThe vehicle maximum load on the load carrying capacity of thewill not exceed the tire’s load adhere to the loading conditioninflation pressures specified on




at o p essu es spec ed oInformation placard and in the “of this manual.

Tire and Loading Information Placard

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear

axles must not be exceeded. For further information onGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to“Vehicle Loading” in this section.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of yourvehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs orXXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and

trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceedthe weight referenced here.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

2. Determine the combined wpassengers that will be riding in

3. Subtract the combined weighsengers from XXX lbs or XXX k

4. The resulting figure equals cargo and luggage load capacitamount equals 1,400 lbs (635 k150 lb (68 kg) passengers in youavailable cargo and luggage l

(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, a[295 kg]).

5. Determine the combined weib i l d d th hi l Th

START



Steps for etermining Correct oad imit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”on your vehicle’s placard.

being loaded on the vehicle. Thexceed the available cargo andcalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE:• The following table shows examples on how to calcu-

late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacitiesof your vehicle with varying seating configurationsand number and size of occupants. This table is forillustration purposes only and may not be accurate for

the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

• For the following example, occupants and cargo shoul

(392 kg).




START



WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloadingcan cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, andincrease your stopping distance. Use tires of therecommended load capacity for your vehicle. Neveroverload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Run Flat Tires

This vehicle is equipped with run flat tires. Although thetires are designed with a “run flat” feature that allows thevehicle to be driven about 50 miles (80 km) at 55 mph( k /h) d h ld b b d

WARNIN

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/Monitoring Telltale Light” ihandling and braking may bhave an accident and be seve

NOTE: The “run flat” feature spare tire or jack. This vehicle is a spare tire or jack.

Tire PressureProper tire inflation pressure issatisfactory operation of yourareas are affected by improper t




(88 km/h), immediate service should be obtained. areas are affected by improper t

Safety

WARNING!• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can

cause accidents.

• Under inflation increases tire flexing and canresult in over-heating and tire failure.

• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushionshock. Objects on the road and chuck holes cancause damage that results in tire failure.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

• Overinflated or under inflated tires can affect

EconomyImproper inflation pressures c

patterns to develop across the tiwear patterns will reduce tread learlier tire replacement. Undertire rolling resistance and consumption.

Ride Comfort and Vehicle StProper tire inflation contributeOver inflation produces a jarring

Both under inflation and over inof the vehicle and can produresponse or over responsivenes

START



vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resultingin loss of vehicle control.

• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift tothe right or left.

Unequal tire pressures can cauable steering response.

Unequal tire pressure from sidvehicle to drift left or right.

Tire Inflation PressuresThe proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the

driver’s side “B” Pillar.The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well asinspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at leastonce a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge tocheck tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgementwhen determining proper inflation. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated even when they are under inflated.

CAUTION!After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure alwaysreinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This will

is defined as the tire pressure been driven for at least three h

1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hoinflation pressure must not exction pressure molded into the t

Check tire pressures more often of outdoor temperatures, as ttemperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approx12°F (7°C) of air temperature chwhen checking tire pressure insithe Winter.

Example: If garage temperatur




prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valvestem, which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure

Example: If garage temperaturoutside temperature = 32°F (inflation pressure should be incwhich equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure

build up or your tire pressure will be too low.Tire Pressures for High Speed OperationThe manufacturer advocates driving at safe speedswithin posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at highspeeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is veryimportant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicleloading may be required for high speed vehicle opera-

tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tiredealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loadingand cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNIN

High speed driving with youmum load is dangerous. Thetires could cause them to fserious accident. Do not drivemaximum capacity at cont75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial-Ply Tires

WARNIN

Combining radial ply tires won your vehicle will cause y

START



on your vehicle will cause ypoorly. The instability couldways use radial tires in sets othem with other types of tires

Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only inthe tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your

dealer for radial tire repairs.Tire SpinningWhen stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do notspin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and do not let

Tread Wear IndicatorsTread wear indicators are in the

to help you in determining whreplaced.




anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what thespeed.

1 — Worn Tire2 — New Tire

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the treadgrooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth

becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to thetread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

Life of TireThe service life of a tire is dependent upon varyingfactors including but not limited to:

• Driving style

• Tire pressure

• Distance driven

WARNING!

Keep unmounted tires in a cooexposure to light as possible. P

with oil, grease and gasoline.Replacement TiresThe tires on your new vehicle pcharacteristics. They should bewear and correct cold tire inflatfacturer strongly recommends tlent to the originals in size, qwhen replacement is needed (se

wear indicators). Refer to the Tition placard for the size desigservice description and load ideon the original equipment tire.

START



All tires should be replaced after six years, regardlessof the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warningcan result in sudden tire failure. You could lose controland have an accident resulting in serious injury.

o e o g eq p e ereplacement tires may adversedling, and ride of your vehicle. contact your original equipmedealer with any questions you

cations or capability.

WARNING!

•

Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other thanthat specified for your vehicle. Some combinationsof unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-pension dimensions and performance characteris-tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, andbraking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-able handling and stress to steering and suspen-sion components. You could lose control and havean accident resulting in serious injury or death.Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratingsapproved for your vehicle.

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index ori h h h i i ll i d

WARNING! (C

• Failure to equip your vehadequate speed capability cfailure and loss of vehicle

CAUTIO

Replacing original tires with may result in false speedomeings.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDo not rotate the tires as the wi

th f t f th hi l




capacity, other than what was originally equippedon your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller loadindex could result in tire overloading and failure.You could lose control and have an accident.

(Continued)

on the front of the vehicle.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)

Premium System

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wirelesstechnology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors tomonitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to eachwheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressurereadings to the Receiver Module.

NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check thetire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintainthe proper pressure.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of thefollowing components:

• Receiver Module

• Various Tire Pressure Monitwhich display in the Electro

Center (EVIC), and a graphic• Tire Pressure Monitoring Tel

Tire Pressure Monitoring LowThe “Tire Pressure Monitilluminate in the instrumdible chime will be activa

the four active road tire pressureElectronic Vehicle Information Cone or more Low Pressure meRear, Right Front, Right Rear) graphic display of the pressurtire(s) flashing Refer to “Electr

START



• Receiver Module

• 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• 3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheelwells)

tire(s) flashing. Refer to ElectrCenter (EVIC)” in Section 4 of t

NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure unitsin PSI, kPa, or BAR.

Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four

The system will automatically play of the pressure value(s) w

“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltaonce the updated tire pressure(svehicle may need to be driven fo15 mph (24 km/h) to receive th

Check TPM System MessageThe “Tire Pressure Monitoring on and off for 75 seconds, and system fault is detected. The sys

a chime. The EVIC will displaTEM” message for three seconthen followed by a graphic dispthe pressure value(s) indicati




Should a low tire condition occur on any of the fouractive road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphicdisplay to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure.

pMonitoring Sensor(s) is not bein

NOTE: Your system can be setin PSI, kPa, or BAR.

If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,providing the system fault still exists. If the system faultno longer exists the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

1. Jamming due to electronic dfacilities emitting the same Radi

sensors.2. Installing some form of aftethat affects radio wave signals.

3. Lots of snow or ice arounhousings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehi

5. Using wheels/tires not equip

In addition, the “Tire Pressure Mwill turn OFF and the graphic innew pressure value instead of d

START



no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight” will no longer flash, the CHECK TPM SYSTEM

text message will not be present, and a pressure valuewill be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault canoccur by any of the following scenarios:

tire pressure is below the low-pany of the four active road tires. be driven for up to 20 minutes ain order for the TPMS to receiv

General InformationThis device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and

RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the

following licenses:

United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123

Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

6.1L Engine

The 6.1L engine emissions regulalent fuel economyusing high-qualigasoline with anhigher.

Light spark knock at low engineyour engine. However, continu

high speeds can cause damage required. Poor quality gasoline as hard starting, stalling, and hence these symptoms try ano




ence these symptoms, try ano before considering service for t

Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued andendorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-

wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel propertiesnecessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-fications, if they are available.

Reformulated GasolineMany areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”

Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe-cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-prove air quality.

The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-

Gasoline/Oxygenate BlendsSome fuel suppliers blend unle

genates such as 10% ethanol, Mates are required in some areas owinter months to reduce carbFuels blended with these oxyyour vehicle.

CAUTIO

DO NOT use gasolines conta

Ethanol. Use of these blendsand driveability problems anfuel system components.

START



The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-vide excellent performance and durability of engine andfuel system components.

Problems that result from usinE85 ethanol blends are not tmanufacturer. While MTBE is amethanol, it does not have Methanol.

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel VehiclesNon-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanolcontent may void the vehicle’s warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• operate in a lean mode

• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on

• poor engine performance

• poor cold start and cold drivability

• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion

T fi N FFV hi l i d l f l d i h

• disconnect and reconnect tengine controller memory

More extensive repairs will beexposure to E-85 fuel.

MMT In GasolineMMT is a manganese-containing blended into some gasoline to i blended with MMT provides no beyond gasoline of the same MMT. Gasoline blended with M

life and reduces emissions systevehicles. The manufacturer recwithout MMT be used in your vof gasoline may not be indicate




To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once withE-85 perform the following:

• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)

• change the engine oil and oil filter

of gasoline may not be indicatetherefore, you should ask your the gasoline contains MMT. It islook for gasoline without MMT i

can be used at levels higher than those allowed in theUnited States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor-nia reformulated gasoline.

Materials Added to FuelAll gasoline sold in the United States is required tocontain effective detergent additives. Use of additionaldetergents or other additives is not needed under normalconditions and they would result in additional cost.Therefore, you should not have to add anything to thefuel.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

F ll h id li i i hi l ’

• The use of leaded gas is proUsing leaded gasoline can imand damage the emissions co

• An out-of-tune engine or cerfunctions can cause the catalyIf you notice a pungent bursmoke, your engine may be tioning and may require immyour authorized dealer for se

• The use of fuel additives, whi

octane enhancers, is not recoproducts contain high concFuel system damage or vehicresulting from the use of such

START



Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’sperformance:

es g o e se o s cthe responsibility of the man

NOTE: Intentional tamperingtrol system can result in civil pagainst you.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.Follow the precautions below to prevent carbonmonoxide poisoning:

• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbonmonoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a

garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with theengine running for an extended period. If the vehicle isstopped in an open area with the engine running formore than a short period, adjust the ventilation systemt f f h t id i i t th hi l

• Guard against carbon monoxnance. Have the exhaust systthe vehicle is raised. Have arepaired promptly. Until repwindows fully open.

• Keep the liftgate/trunk clovehicle to prevent carbon moous exhaust gases from enter




to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

ADDING FUEL

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on thedriver’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost ordamaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with thisvehicle.

CAUTIO

• Damage to the fuel systesystem could result from ucap (gas cap). A poorly fittirities into the fuel systemafter-market cap can cause cator Light (MIL)” to illumiescaping from the system.

• A poorly fitting gas cap maon.

• To avoid fuel spillage and off” the fuel tank after filli

NOTE: When the fuel nozzle

START



NOTE: When the fuel nozzle fuel tank is full.

Fuel Filler Cap

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or nearthe vehicle when the gas cap is removed or thetank filled.

• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This isin violation of most state and federal fire regula-tions and will cause the MIL to turn on.

NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until youhear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly

tightened.

If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will comeon. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehiclei f l d

WARNIN

A fire may result if gasoliportable container that is incould be burned. Always placground while filling.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap MessagIf the vehicle diagnostic systemfiller cap is loose, improperly i“CHECK GASCAP” message

EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Infor“Electronic Vehicle Informationthis manual. Tighten the fuel filsound is heard. This is an indi




is refueled. cap is properly tightened. ReferSystem — OBDII” in Section 7 information.

CAUTION!

Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys-tem could result from using an improper fuel tankfiller cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could letimpurities into the fuel system.

WARNING!

• Never add fuel when the engine is running.

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near

the vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or thetank filled.

TRAILER TOWINGIn this section you will find safon limits to the type of towingwith your vehicle. Before towiview this information to tow yosafely as possible.

WARNIN

• Do not tow when the “TirTelltale Light” is illumina

this could result in loss oinjury.

• The tailpipes may be hot aously injured if you comet il i

START



tailpipes.

To maintain warranty coverageand recommendations in this hicles used for trailer towing.

Common Towing DefinitionsThe following trailer towing related definitions will assistyou in understanding the following information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongueweight. The total load must be limited so that you do notexceed the GVWR.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all

cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded andready for operation condition. The recommended way tomeasure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a

Gross Combination Weight RThe GCWR is the total permissiband trailer when weighed in co

NOTE: The GCWR rating inallowance for the presence of a

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GThe GAWR is the maximum capaxles. Distribute the load over evenly. Make sure that you do nrear GAWR.

WARNIN

It is important that you do nofront or rear GAWR A dange




vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must besupported by the scale.

front or rear GAWR. A dangecan result if either rating is excontrol of the vehicle and hav

Tongue Weight (TW)The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on thehitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be lessthan 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You mustconsider this as part of the load on your vehicle.

Frontal AreaThe frontal area is the maximum height and maximumwidth of the front of a trailer.

Weight-Carrying HitchA weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue

weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball orsome other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind ofhitches are the most popular on the market today andthey’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized

Weight-Distributing HitchA weight-distributing system wage through spring (load) barsfor heavier loads, to distribute the tow vehicle’s front axle andused in accordance with the manprovides for a more level ride, steering and brake control thsafety. The addition of a frictionalso dampens sway caused by trcontributes positively to tow ve

Trailer sway control and a wequalizing) hitch are recommenWeights (TW) and may be requirand Trailer configuration/loadi

START



trailers. axle weight rating (GAWR) requ

WARNING!

• An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitchsystem may reduce handling, stability, brakingperformance, and could result in an accident.

• Weight-distributing hitch systems may not becompatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consultwith your hitch and trailer manufacturer or areputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for addi-tional information.

Trailer Hitch ClassificationThe following chart provides the industry standard forthe maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class cantow and should be used to assist you in selecting the

Trailer Hitch Classifica

Class Max.

Class I - Light Duty

Class II - MediumDuty

3

Class III - Heavy Duty 5

Class IV - ExtraHeavy Duty

1

Fifth Wheel/

Gooseneck

Gr

Refer to the “Trailer Towing WTrailer Weight Ratings)” chart Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) todrivetrain




correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum TrailerWeight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for yourgiven drivetrain.

drivetrain.

All trailer hitches should be pryour vehicle.

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given

Engine/Transmission GCWR (Gross CombinedWt. Rating) Frontal Area Max. GTW (GrossTrailer Wt.)

6.1L Automatic 8,800 lbs (3 992 kg) 35 sq ft (3.25 sq m) 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)

Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered aspart of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, andshould never exceed the weight referenced on the Tireand Loading Information placard. Refer to the “Tire–

Safety Information” section in this manual.

START



Trailer and Trailer Tongue WeightAlways load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight inthe front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of theGross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of yourvehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in therear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to sidewhich will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause ofmany trailer accidents.

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped onyour trailer hitch.

Consider the following itemsweight on the front/rear axles o

• The trailer tongue weight of




g g

• The weight of any other typput in or on your vehicle.

• The weight of the driver and

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on thetrailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additionalfactory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,

must be considered as part of the total load on yourvehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac-ard in the “Tire Safety Information” section of thismanual for the maximum combined weight of occupantsand cargo for your vehicle.

Towing RequirementsTo promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-train components the following guidelines are recom-mended:

CAUTION!

A id t i t il f th fi t 500 il

CAUTION! (C

• During the first 500 mile

towing, limit your speed to

WARNIN

• Improper towing can leadFollow these guidelines toing as safe as possible:

• Make certain that the load

and will not shift during tcargo that is not fully securcan occur that may be difcontrol. You could lose conhave an accident

START



• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may dam-age your vehicle.

(Continued)

have an accident.

• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause aloss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,

axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-sis structure or tires.

• Safety chains must always be used between yourvehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to thehook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chainsunder the trailer tongue and allow enough slack forturning corners.

• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.When parking, apply the parking brake on the towvehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK.Always, block or chock the trailer wheels.

• Total weight must be distrivehicle and the trailer suchratings are not exceeded:

1. GVWR

2. GTW

3. GAWR

4. Tongue weight rating for (This requirement may limiachieve the 10% to 15% rang

percentage of total trailer we

Towing Requirements — Tire

− Proper tire inflation pressureand satisfactory operation o




• GCWR must not be exceeded.and satisfactory operation o“Tires–General Information”procedures.

− Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-sures before trailer usage.

− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires–General Infor-mation” for proper inspection procedure.

− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires–General Informa-tion” for proper tire replacement procedures. Replac-ing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will notincrease the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system orvacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.This could cause inadequate braking and possiblepersonal injury

− An electronically actuated trrequired when towing a tractuated brakes. When towin

a hydraulic surge actuated br brake controller is not requir

− Trailer brakes are recomm1,000 lbs (454 kg) and require2,000 lbs (907 kg).

CAUTIO

If the trailer weighs more thloaded, it should have its should be of adequate capaccould lead to accelerated brabrake pedal effort and longe

START



personal injury. brake pedal effort, and longe

WARNING!

• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s

hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brakesystem and cause it to fail. You might not havebrakes when you need them and could have anaccident.

• Towing any trailer will increase your stoppingdistance. When towing you should allow for addi-tional space between your vehicle and the vehiclein front of you. Failure to do so could result in an

accident.

Towing TipsBefore setting out on a trip, practice turning, stoppingand backing the trailer in an area away from heavy

Automatic TransmissionThe DRIVE range can be selecever, if frequent shifting occurs

the Autostickfeature (D-) to se

NOTE: Using a lower gear ravehicle under heavy operating performance and extend transmexcessive shifting and heat buildprovide better engine braking.

The automatic transmission flu

changed if you REGULARLY to45 minutes of continuous operatenance Schedule” in Section proper maintenance intervals.




and backing the trailer in an area away from heavytraffic.

Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped

− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

− When using the speed control, if you experience speeddrops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage untilyou can get back to cruising speed.

− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads tomaximize fuel efficiency.

Cooling SystemTo reduce potential for engine and transmission over-

heating, take the following actions:− City Driving When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

− Highway Driving Reduce speed.

−

Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BMOTORHOME, ETC.)Recreational towing is not allo

START



WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

▫Run Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . .

Emergency Tow Hooks — If

Towing A Disabled Vehicle .



HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSThe Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on theswitch bank just above the climate controls.

Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warningflasher. When the switch is activated, all directionalturn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming

traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time toturn off the Hazard Warning flasher.

This is an emergency warning system and should not beused when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your

vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard forother motorists.

If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, theHazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with thei iti k d d th hi l l k d

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEAIn any of the following situatipotential for overheating by ta

tion.

• On the highways — Slow do

• In city traffic — While stoppeNEUTRAL, but do not increa

CAUTIO

Driving with a hot cooling your vehicle. If the temperat(H), pull over and stop the vewith the air conditioner turnedrops back into the normal

i HOT (H) d

300 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES



ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.

NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashermay run down your battery.

remains on HOT (H), and chimes, turn the engine off imservice.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow downan impending overheat condition:

•

If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/Csystem adds heat to the engine cooling system andturning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

• You can also turn the Temperature Control to maxi-mum heat, the Mode Control to floor and the BlowerControl to high. This allows the heater core to act as asupplement to the radiator and aids in removing heatfrom the engine cooling system.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

Run Flat TiresThis vehicle is equipped with run flat tires. Although thetires are designed with a “run flat” feature that allows the

WARNIN

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/

Monitoring Telltale Light” ihandling and braking may bhave an accident and be seve

NOTE: The “run flat” feature spare tire and jack. This vehiceither a spare tire or jack.

JUMP-STARTINGIf the vehicle has a discharged ba be used to obtain a start from battery in another vehicle. Thdangerous if done improperly,

WHAT TO



tires are designed with a run flat feature that allows thevehicle to be driven approximately 50 miles (80 km) at55 mph (88 km/h). immediate service should be ob-tained.

carefully.

WARNING!

• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or

bracelets that might make an inadvertent electricalcontact. You could be seriously injured.

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution that cancause serious burns; do not allow battery fluid tocontact eyes, skin or clothing. Wear safety glassesand protect your eyes at all times. If acid splashesin eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area imme-diately with large quantities of water.

• A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark awayfrom the vent holes. Do not lean over the batterywhen attaching clamps or allow the clamps totouch each other.

WARNING! (C

• Do not use a booster batte

source that has a greater thdo not use a 24 Volt power

1. Remove all metal jewelry s bracelets, which might make contact.

2. Park the booster vehicle without letting the vehicles touch. S

both vehicles, place the transmthe ignition OFF.

3. Turn off the heater, radio andloads.




touch each other.

(Continued)

4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positiveterminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end ofthe same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged

battery.

WARNING!

• Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as thiscould establish a ground connection and personalinjury could result.

• Do not connect the cable to the negative post of thedischarged battery. The resulting electrical sparkcould cause the battery to explode and could resultin personal injury.

(Continued)

WARNING! (C

• During cold weather when

low the freezing point, elecbattery may freeze. Do notbecause the battery could rcause personal injury. Battebrought above freezing pojump-start.

5. Connect the other cable, firstof the booster battery and thvehicle with the discharged batta good contact on the engine.

6. Start the engine in the vehi battery, let the engine idle a few

WHAT TO



y, gengine in the vehicle with the d

7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the abovesequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.

WARNING!

Any procedure other than above could result in:

• Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting outthe battery vent.

• Personal injury or property damage due to batteryexplosion.

CAUTION!Any procedure other than above could result indamage to the charging system of the booster vehicleor of the immobilized vehicle.

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS If your vehicle is equipped withone in the rear and two moun

vehicle. The rear hook will be loof the vehicle.

NOTE: For off-road recovery, both of the front tow hooks damage to the vehicle.

CAUTIO

Tow hooks are for emergencvehicle stranded off road. Dotow truck hookup or highwdamage your vehicle.




WARNING!

Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.

Tow straps and chains may break, causing seriousinjury.

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLEThe manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with allfour wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

CAUTIO

Towing this vehicle using an

result in extensive damage to transmission.

WHAT TO



MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

Engine Compartment – 6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Onboard Diagnostic System – OBD II . . . . . . 310

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . 310

Emissions Inspection And MaintenancePrograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . .

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenan

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . .

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades

▫ Adding Washer Fluid . .



Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

g

▫ Exhaust System . . . . . .

▫ Cooling System . . . . . .

▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

▫ Appearance Care And Protection FromCorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

▫ Underhood Fuses(Power Distribution Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

▫Underhood Fuses(Integrated Power Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

▫ High Intensity Discharge H— If Equipped . . . . . . . .

▫ Halogen Headlamps — If E

▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . .

▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . .

▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn SignaLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Center High-Mounted Stop(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fluid Capacities . . . . . . .

Fluids, Lubricants, And Genu

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .

308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE



Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . .

ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 6.1L

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick2 — Power Distribution Center 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

MAINTA



3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Oil Fill4 — Integrated Power Module 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap5 — Battery 11 — Air Cleaner Filter6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM – OBD IIYour vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboarddiagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors

the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatictransmission control systems. When these systems areoperating properly, your vehicle will provide excellentperformance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-sions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II systemwill turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). Itwill also store diagnostic codes and other information to

assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-though your vehicle will usually be drivable and notneed towing, see your authorized dealer for service assoon as possible.

CAUTIO

• Prolonged driving with th

further damage to the emiscould also affect fuel econovehicle must be serviced tests can be performed.

• If the MIL is flashing whilesevere catalytic converter dwill soon occur. Immediate

Loose Fuel Filler Cap MessaAfter fuel is added, the vehicldetermine if the fuel filler cinstalled, or damaged. A “CHEwill be displayed in the EVIC (

l) Ti ht th




manual). Tighten the gas cap uheard. This is an indication thatightened.

The message will remain displayed until the vehiclediagnostic system can retest the fuel system. The test willperform the next time the vehicle is started, if the vehicle

was keyed off above 40°F (4°C) outside temperature andthe following vehicle start is above 40°F (4°C) outsidetemperature. It may be possible to have a message thatwill not clear due to the test being disabled due to lowoutside temperatures. If the test is performed and theproblem is gone, the message will disappear.

If the problem persists, the message will appear the nexttime the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged

cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the systemwill turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn theMIL off. See your authorized dealer for service.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCEPROGRAMS

Failure to pass could prevent ve

For states that require annance (I/M), this check Indicator Light (MIL)”

on when the engine is runninsystem is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system wsystem may not be ready if yoserviced, recently had a dead bament. If the OBD II system sh

ready for the I/M test, your vehYour vehicle has a simple ignwhich you can use prior to goicheck if your vehicle’s OBD II sydo the following:

MAINTA



PROGRAMSIn some localities, it may be a legal requirement to passan inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.

1. Insert your ignition key into

2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crankor start the engine.

3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to startthis test over.

4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, youwill see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulbcheck.

5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things willhappen:

a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and thenreturn to being fully illuminated until you turn OFFthe ignition or start the engine. This means that yourvehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you shouldnot proceed to the I/M station.

engine. This means that youris ready and you can proceed

If your OBD II system is not reaauthorized dealer or repair facrecently serviced or had a batteryou may need to do nothingvehicle as you normally would system to update. A recheck wimay then indicate that the syste

Regardless of whether your ve

ready or not, if the MIL is illuvehicle operation you should ha before going to the I/M stationyour vehicle because the MILrunning.




b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fullyilluminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the

REPLACEMENT PARTSUse of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduledmaintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-

sure the designed performance. Damage or failurescaused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenanceand repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’swarranty.

DEALER SERVICEYour authorized dealer has the qualified service person-nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all serviceoperations in an expert manner. Service Manuals areavailable which include detailed service information foryour vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attemptingany procedure yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions controlsystems may void your warranty and could result in civil

WARNIN

You can be badly injured w

motor vehicle. Only do servihave the knowledge and theyou have any doubt about yoservice job, take your vehicchanic.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURThe pages that follow contain th

services determined by the engivehicle.

Besides those maintenance itemmaintenance schedule, there aremay require servicing or replac

MAINTA



systems may void your warranty and could result in civilpenalties being assessed against you.

y q g p

CAUTION!

• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-

form repairs and service when necessary couldresult in more costly repairs, damage to othercomponents or negatively impact vehicle perfor-mance. Immediately have potential malfunctionsexamined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLCdealership or qualified repair center.

• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluidsthat protect the performance and durability of

your vehicle and also allow extended maintenanceintervals. Do not use chemical flushes in thesecomponents as the chemicals can damage yourengine, transmission, power steering or air condi-tioning. Such damage is not covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed

Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level

To assure proper engine lubrica be maintained at the correct levregular intervals, such as every fcheck the engine oil level is abfully warmed engine is shut oengine after it has sat overnight

Checking the oil while the vehicimprove the accuracy of the oil

the oil level in the “SAFE” rangewhen the reading is at the bottwill result in an oil level at the on these engines.

NOTE: Fill engine oil one qua




Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is neededbecause of component malfunction, use only thespecified fluid for the flushing procedure.

NOTE: Fill engine oil one qua

CAUTION!

• Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration

or loss of oil pressure. This could damage yourengine.

• Operating the engine with the oil levels below thesafe zone, or operating with oil levels that exceedthe top of the safe zone may cause engine damage.

Change Engine OilThe oil change indicator system will remind you that it is

time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 forinformation on this system.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil changeintervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,

h h f

Engine Oil SelectionFor best performance and maximtypes of operating conditions,

recommends full synthetic enrequirements of Chrysler Mateand are approved to MB 229.3 oon the back label of the oil cont

CAUTIO

Do not use chemical flushes inchemicals can damage your e

not covered by the New Vehic

Engine Oil ViscositySAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 enginin all operating temperatures.

MAINTA



whichever occurs first.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommendedengine oil viscosity for your engine. For information onengine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-

ment” in this section.Synthetic Engine OilsYou may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changesare followed.

Materials Added to Engine OilThe manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) tothe engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product andit’s performance may be impaired by supplementaladditives.

Di i f U d E i Oil d Oil Filt

indiscriminately discarded, can environment. Contact your degovernmental agency for advice

oil and oil filters can be safely dEngine Oil FilterThe engine oil filter should be oil change.

Engine Oil Filter SelectionThe manufacturer’s engines hfilter. Use a filter of this type for of replacement filters varies cquality filters should be used service. MOPAR engine oil filtfilter and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner FilterR f t th “M i t S h




Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil FiltersCare should be taken in disposing of used engine oil andoil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,

Refer to the “Maintenance Scheproper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection

in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the aircleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair ormaintenance. Make sure that no one is near theengine compartment before starting the vehicle withthe air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result inserious personal injury.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter SelectionThe quality of replacement engine air cleaner filtersvaries considerably. Only high quality filters should beused to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine aircleaner filters are a high quality filter and arerecommended.

Maintenance-Free BatteryYour vehicle is equipped with a You will never have to add wat

tenance required.

CAUTIO

It is essential when replacibattery that the positive cabpositive post and the negativenegative post. Battery posts aand negative (-) and identifi

Also, if a “fast charger” is usedvehicle, disconnect both vehicconnecting the charger to batcharger” to provide starting v

MAINTA



Air Conditioner MaintenanceFor best possible performance, your air conditionershould be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer

at the start of each warm season. This service shouldinclude cleaning of the condenser fins and a performancetest. Drive belt tension should also be checked at thistime.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioningsystem as the chemicals can damage your air condi-

tioning components. Such damage is not covered bythe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNIN

• Use only refrigerants and

approved by the manufactutioning system. Some unapflammable and can explodunapproved refrigerants othe system to fail, requiringSection 3 of the Warranty cated on the DVD, for furttion.

•

The air conditioning systeunder high pressure. To ainjury or damage to the sysor any repair requiring linshould be done by an expe




NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C SystemSealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-sor Oil, or Refrigerants.

Refrigerant Recovery and RecyclingR-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the EnvironmentalProtection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioningservice be performed by dealers or other service facilitiesusing recovery and recycling equipment.

Body LubricationLocks and all body pivot points, including such items asseat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such asMOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure

concerned should be wiped clgrit; after lubricating excess oremoved. Particular attention s

hood latching components to When performing other underlatch, release mechanism and cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders shoyear, preferably in the Fall andamount of a high quality lubrLock Cylinder Lubricant or equ

lock cylinder.Windshield Wiper BladesClean the rubber edges of thwindshield periodically with a smild nonabrasive cleaner. This

MAINTA



quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust andwear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts

tions of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periodsmay cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always usewasher fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt

from a dry windshield.Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice fromthe windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact withpetroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poorperformance of blades may be present with chattering,marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition ispresent please proceed to clean wiper blades with humidcloth removing any debris that may be affecting itsfunction.

Adding Washer FluidOn vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Informa-

windshield will light on the vehthe “Washer Fluid Low” messagto “Electronic Vehicle Informati

this manual.The fluid reservoir for the winrear window washer is sharedlocated in the engine compartmfluid level at regular intervalswindshield washer solvent onlyWhen refilling the washer fluwasher fluid and apply it to a

clean the wiper blades, this willTo prevent freeze-up of your win cold weather, select a solutionexceeds the temperature rangrating information can be founcontainers




On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will beindicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the

containers.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer solvents

are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Caremust be exercised when filling or working aroundthe washer solution.

Exhaust SystemThe best protection against carbon monoxide entry intothe vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaustsystem.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaustsystem, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside thevehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle isdamaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open

inspect the exhaust system eachfor lubrication or oil change. Re

WARNINExhaust gases can injure or kimonoxide (CO) which is cBreathing it can make you eventually poison you. To avlow the preceding safety tips

CAUTIO

The catalytic converter requirfuel only. Leaded gasoline winess of the catalyst as an emand may seriously reduce encause serious damage to the e

MAINTA



damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Openseams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumesto seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,

cause serious damage to the e

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure

proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalystdamage.

CAUTION!

Damage to the catalytic converter can result if yourvehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. Inthe event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-

mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-ued operation of your vehicle with a severemalfunction could cause the converter to overheat,resulting in possible damage to the converter and thevehicle.

NOTE: Intentional tamperingsystems can result in civil pagainst you.

WARNIN

A hot exhaust system can starmaterials that can burn. Sugrass or leaves coming into cosystem. Do not park or operatwhere your exhaust system cacan burn.

In unusual situations involvingengine operation, a scorching oand abnormal catalyst overheavehicle should be stopped, thevehicle allowed to cool. Therea




vehicle allowed to cool. Thereatune-up to manufacturer’s spectained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignitionwhen the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in

motion.

• Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing thevehicle.

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wiresdisconnected or removed, such as when diagnostictesting, or for prolonged periods during very roughidling or malfunctioning operating conditions.

Cooling System

WARNIN

• When working near the raconnect the fan motor leaswitch to the OFF position.controlled and can start atswitch is in the ON positio

• You or others can be badlycoolant (antifreeze) or steamyou see or hear steam co

hood, do not open the hoodhad time to cool. Never system pressure cap when

MAINTA



Coolant ChecksCheck the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where

applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty orrusty in appearance, the system should be drained,flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front ofthe A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a gardenhose vertically down the face of the condenser.

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection

at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system forleaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (butnot running), check the cooling system pressure cap forproper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of

i l t ( tif ) f th di t d i k

If the cap is sealing properly, tfreeze) will begin to drain fro bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE

CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYCooling System — Drain, FluIf the engine coolant (antifreezconsiderable amount of sedimenreliable cooling system cleaner.rinsing to remove all deposits dispose of the old engine coolan

Refer to the “Maintenance Scheproper maintenance intervals.

Selection Of CoolantUse only the manufacturer’s recfer to “Fluids, Lubricants, andsection for the correct fluid typ




engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.yp

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than

specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), mayresult in engine damage and may decrease corro-sion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling systemin an emergency, it should be replaced with thespecified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon aspossible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol based enginecoolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as theymay not be compatible with the engine coolant(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (C

• This vehicle has not been Propylene Glycol based freeze). Use of Propylenecoolant (antifreeze) is not r

Adding CoolantYour vehicle has been built wcoolant (antifreeze) that allowintervals. This engine coolant (ato 5 Years or 102,000 miles (170

ment. To prevent reducing thiperiod, it is important that yocoolant (antifreeze) throughouPlease review these recommendOrganic Additive Technology (antifreeze).

MAINTA



(antifreeze).

When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• The manufacturer recommends using MOPARAntifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula

HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) orequivalent.

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentra-tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below 34°F(37°C ) are anticipated.

• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-

ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality waterwill reduce the amount of corrosion protection in theengine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner’tain the proper level of proteccording to the temperatures occ

the vehicle is operated.NOTE: Mixing engine coolandecrease the life of the engine will require more frequent enchanges.

Cooling System Pressure CapThe cap must be fully tightenedcoolant (antifreeze), and to en

(antifreeze) will return to the rrecovery bottle.

The cap should be inspected anaccumulation of foreign materia




WARNING!

• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on

the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen orremove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heatcauses pressure to build up in the cooling system.To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove thepressure cap while the system is hot or underpressure.

• Do not use a pressure cap other than the onespecified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-gine damage may result.

Disposal of Used Engine CoolantUsed ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) isa regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check

rules for your community. To pmals or children, do not storengine coolant (antifreeze) in op

to remain in puddles on the grouor pet, seek emergency assistancany ground spills immediately.

Coolant LevelThe coolant bottle provides a determining that the coolant levengine off and cold, the leve(antifreeze) in the bottle should

indicated on the bottle.The radiator normally remains cno need to remove the radiatorengine coolant (antifreeze) freegine coolant (antifreeze). Advis

MAINTA



a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Checkwith your local authorities to determine the disposal

of this. As long as the engine operating temperature issatisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked oncea month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed tomaintain the proper level, it should be added to thecoolant bottle. Do not overfill.

Points to Remember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (afew kilometers) of operation, you may observe vaporcoming from the front of the engine compartment. This is

normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or highhumidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot enginecoolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows noevidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be

• Do not overfill the coolant re

• Check engine coolant (antifrradiator and in the coolant r

coolant (antifreeze) needs tocoolant recovery bottle must freezing.

• If frequent engine coolant (arequired, or if the level in thedoes not drop when the ensystem should be pressure te

•

Maintain engine coolant (ant50% HOAT engine coolantand distilled water for propeyour engine which contains a

• Make sure that the radiatobottle overflow hoses are no




evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may besafely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

bottle overflow hoses are no

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle isequipped with air conditioning, keep the front of thecondenser clean.

• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winteroperation. If replacement is ever necessary, install onlythe correct type thermostat. Other designs may resultin unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas mile-age, and increased emissions.

Brake System

Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder

The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checkedwhenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluidto bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoirof the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top ofthe master cylinder area before removing the cap. Withd b k fl d l l b d f ll h b k

pads wear. Brake fluid level spads are replaced. If the brake low, check system for leaks.

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, ansection for the correct fluid typ

WARNIN

• Use only manufacturer’sfluid. Refer to “Fluids, LuParts” in this section for Using the wrong type of br

damage your brake systemformance. The proper typevehicle is also labeled oinstalled hydraulic master

MAINTA



disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake


• To avoid contamination from foreign matter ormoisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that

has been in a tightly closed container. Keep themaster cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisturefrom the air resulting in a lower boiling point.This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hardor prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brakefailure. This could result in a accident.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in

spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causingthe brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can alsodamage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should betaken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

(Continued)

WARNING! (C

• Do not allow petroleum bnate the brake fluid. Brake

be damaged, causing partfailure. This could result in

Automatic Transmission

Fluid Level CheckRegular automatic transmissionrequired. For this reason the dip

If you notice fluid loss or trmalfunction, have your authotransmission fluid level.




CAUTION!

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not

require adjustment under normal operating condi-tions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit yourauthorized dealer immediately. Severe damage to thetransmission may occur. Your authorized dealer hasthe proper tools to accurately adjust the fluid level.

Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion

Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roadspassable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed ontrees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highlycorrosive to the metal in your vehicle.

The following maintenance recoyou to obtain maximum benresistance built into your vehicl

What Causes Corrosion?Corrosion is the result of detepaint and protective coatings fr

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture

• Stone and gravel impact.

•

Insects, tree sap and tar.• Salt in the air near seacoast lo

• Atmospheric fallout/industr

MAINTA



Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild

car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely withclear water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bugand Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPARCleaner Wax to remove road film, stains, and to

protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch thepaint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffingthat may diminish the gloss or thin out the paintfinish.

CAUTIO

• Do not use abrasive or strsuch as steel wool or scouriscratch metal and painted s

• Use of power washers (8 274 kPa) can result in dpaint and decals.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dus

near the ocean, hose off the una month.

• It is important that the drainof the doors, rocker panels aclear and open.




• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs isconsidered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident orsimilar cause which destroys the paint and protectivecoating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil-ity of the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are wellpackaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, considermud or stone shields behind each wheel.

• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent onscratches or chips as soon as possible. Your authorizeddealer has touch up paint to match the color of your

Wheel and Wheel Trim CareAll wheels and wheel trim, eschrome-plated wheels should bemild soap and water to prevenheavy soil, use MOPAR Whnonabrasive, non-acidic cleanepads, steel wool, a bristle brushMOPAR cleaners or equivalennot use oven cleaner. Avoid auuse acidic solutions or harsh brthe wheels’ protective finish.

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning EquippedStain Repel seats may be cleanener:

• Remove as much of the stainwith a clean, dry towel.

MAINTA



p p yvehicle.

y

• Blot any remaining stain wit

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mildsoap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove thestain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-PurposeCleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth andremove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to removesoap residue.

• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form ofprotectants on Stain Repel products.

Interior Care

Use MOPAR

Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabricupholstery and carpeting.

Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a dampcloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva-lent, then MOPAR Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent

if absolutely necessary. Do noArmor All. Use MOPAR Totclean vinyl upholstery.

Leather Seat Care & CleaningMOPAR Total Clean or equivamended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be bcleaning with a damp soft clotcan act as an abrasive and damaand should be removed promStubborn soils can be removed

and MOPAR Total Clean or eqtaken to avoid soaking your lealiquid. Please do not use polishsolvents, detergents, or ammoniyour leather upholstery. Applictioner is not required to mainta




q

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.Many are potentially flammable, and if used inclosed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

Glass SurfacesAll glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basiswith MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercialhousehold-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive typecleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windowsequipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or

other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on thetowel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleanerdirectly on the mirror.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument CThe lenses in front of the instrumolded in clear plastic. When must be taken to avoid scratchi

1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mused, but do not use high alccleaners. If soap is used, wipe cle

2. Dry with a soft tissue.

Seat Belt MaintenanceDo not bleach, dye or clean

solvents or abrasive cleaners. ThSun damage will also weaken t

If the belts need cleaning, use mild soap solution, or lukewarthe belts from the vehicle to wa

Replace the belts if they appear

MAINTA



Replace the belts if they appear buckles do not work properly.

FUSES

Interior FusesThe fuse panel is on the lower instrument panel just to

the left of the steering column.

CavityCartridge

FuseMini-Fuse

1 30 Amp

Green2 15 AmpBlue

3 10 AmpRed

4 20 AmpYellow

5 10 AmpRed

6 Spare (B+)

7 20 AmpYellow

8 Spare (B+)

9 20 AmpYellow

Fuse Panel




Yellow

CavityCartridge

FuseMini-Fuse Description

10 10 Amp

Red

Final Drive Control

Module (FDCM),Heater Ventilation/Air Conditioning(HVAC), Rear HeatedSeat Switch, O/H,Heater Ventilation/Air Conditioning(HVAC) Relay, RearPark Assist

11 Spare (B+)12 10 Amp

RedDoor Mods, O/HLamps, IP CourtesyLamps, Glove BoxLamp (B+)

13 10 AmpRed

Autowipe (R/A)

CavityCartridge

FuseMini-Fuse

14 20 Amp

Yellow15 10 AmpRed

16 10 AmpRed

17 15 AmpBlue

19 Spare(R/S)

20 10 AmpRed

MAINTA



Red

CavityCartridge


21 Spare (Acc

Delay)22 15 AmpBlue

Rear Wiper (B+)

24 10 AmpRed

Power DistributionCenter (PDC) Relays,Powertrain ControlModule, A580 (R/S)

25 10 AmpRed

Shifter Assy (BTSI),Trans. Case Switch,

ESP/ABS, TrailerSway Damp Relay

Underhood Fuses (Power Di

Power Distributi




CavityCartridge


1 50 Amp

Red

PTC Heater 1 (Diesel

Only)2 40 AmpGreen

HID Headlamps

3 50 AmpRed

PTC Heater 2 (DieselOnly)

4 30 AmpPink

Power Outlets

5 50 AmpRed

PTC Heater 3 (DieselOnly)

6 30 AmpPink

Cig Lighter, Trail TowBatt

7 40 AmpGreen

Power Liftgate (Com-mander Only)

8 40 AmpGreen

Starter, JB Power

CavityCartridge

FuseMini-Fuse

9 20 Amp

Blue10 —

11 40 AmpGreen

12 30 AmpPink

13 40 AmpGreen

14 30 AmpPink

15 —

16 50 AmpRed

MAINTA



CavityCartridge


17 30 Amp

Pink

ABS Pump

18 40 AmpGreen

Accessory Delay,Seats

19 40 AmpGreen

JB Power

20 30 AmpPink

Wiper Motor

21 20 AmpYellow

Fuel Pump

22 20 AmpYellow

TCM, A/C Clutch

23 25 AmpNatural

Power Inverter

24 20 AmpYellow

Rear Heated Seats

CavityCartridge

FuseMini-Fuse

25 20 Amp

Yellow26 15 AmpBlue

27 20 AmpYellow

28 30 AmpGreen

29 20 AmpYellow

30 —

31 —

32 15 AmpBlue




CavityCartridge


33 20 Amp

Yellow

Final Drive Control

Module (FDCM)E-Diff

34 — Spare

35 20 AmpYellow

Trail-Tow Mod (Ex-port Only)

36 — Spare

37 20 AmpYellow

Ignition Switch

38 20 AmpYellow HID Left

39 20 AmpYellow

HID Right

40 25 AmpNatural

Next Generation Con-troller (NGC), Injec-tors

CavityCartridge

FuseMini-Fuse

41 20 Amp

Yellow42 —

43 25 AmpNatural

44 —

MAINTA



Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module)Cavity

CartridgeFuse

Mini-Fuse

8 10 AmpRed

9 10 AmpRed

10 10 AmpRed

12 20 AmpYellow

13 20 AmpYellow

14 20 AmpYellow

15 20 AmpYellow

16 20 AmpYellow

Integrated Power Module




CavityCartridge


17 20 AmpYellow

Rear Fog Lamps (Ex-port Only)

18 20 AmpYellow

Front Control Module(FCM) Batt #1

19 20 AmpYellow

Lt Trailer-Tow Stop/Turn

20 20 AmpYellow

Front Control Module(FCM) Batt #3

21 20 AmpYellow

Rt Trailer-Tow Stop/Turn

22 30 AmpPink

Final Drive ControlModule (FDCM)MOD

23 50 AmpRed

Radiator Fan

CavityCartridge

FuseMini-Fuse

27 15 AmpBlue

28 20 AmpYellow

29 10 AmpRed

30 10 Amp

Red

MAINTA



VEHICLE STORAGEIf you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery. You may:

• Remove fuse #27 in the Intelligent Power Modulelabeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD#1).

• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out ofservice (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run theair conditioning system at idle for about five minutesin the fresh air and high blower setting. This willensure adequate system lubrication to minimize thepossibility of compressor damage when the system isstarted again.

REPLACEMENT BULBS

Interior Lights Glove Box Lamp . . . . . . . . . . Grab Handle Lamp . . . . . . . . .

Overhead Console Reading LamRear Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . .Visor Vanity Lamp . . . . . . . . .Underpanel Courtesy Lamps . Instrument Cluster (General IlluTelltale/Hazard Lamp . . . . . .

Exterior Lights Backup Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . .

Front Park/Turn Lamp. . . . . . Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . .Headlamps (Low Beam) – High(HID) . . . . . . . . . . D1S (ServiHeadlamps (Low Beam) . . . . . Headlamps (High Beam) . . . .




Rear Turn/Stop/Tail Lamps . .

NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types thatcan be purchased from your authorized dealer.

If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized

dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.

BULB REPLACEMENT

High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — IfEquippedThe headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.High voltage can remain in the circuit even with theheadlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of

this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulbyourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle toan authorized dealer for service.

WARNIN

A transient high tension occurHigh Intensity Discharge (HID

headlamp switch is turned ONelectrical shock or electrocutioerly. See your authorized dea

NOTE: On vehicles equipped charge (HID) headlamps, whturned on, there is a blue hue tishes and becomes more wh

10 seconds, as the system charg

MAINTA



Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped

1. Open the hood.

2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn

counterclockwise to remove from housing.

3. Disconnect the electrical co bulb.

CAUTIO

Do not touch the new bulb contamination will severely sbulb comes in contact with anbulb with rubbing alcohol.

Front Turn Signal

1. Open the hood.

2. Turn the turn signal bulb onclockwise to remove from hous

1 — High Beam Bulb 3 — Turn Signal Bulb2 — Low Beam Bulb




3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb.

CAUTIO

Do not touch the new bulb contamination will severely s

bulb comes in contact with anbulb with rubbing alcohol.

Front Fog Lamp

1. Reach behind the front fascia

2. Turn the front fog lamp bulbterclockwise to remove from ho

3. Disconnect the electrical con1 — High Beam Bulb 3 — Turn Signal Bulb2 — Low Beam Bulb

MAINTA



CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oilcontamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the

bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean thebulb with rubbing alcohol.

Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamps

1. Raise the liftgate.

2. Remove the two Torx fasteners.

3. Squeeze the socket assembly housing.




4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.

5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach thelamp assembly.

Center High-Mounted Stop L

1. Remove the two screws secu

2. Twist the bulb socket to remhousing.

3. Pull the bulb out of the sock

4. Replace the bulb, reinstall thCHMSL

1 — Tail/Stop Lamp Bulb 3 — Back-Up Lamp Bulb2 — Tail/Turn Signal Bulb

MAINTA



CHMSL.

FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S.

Fuel (Approximate) 21 Gallons

Engine Oil with Filter6.1 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-40, API Certified) 7 Quarts

Cooling System *

6.1 Liter Engine (MOPAR Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)

14.8 Quarts

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.




FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile brid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.

Engine Oil For best performance and maximum protection uning conditions, the manufacturer only recommendsoils that meet the requirements of Chrysler Materiaand are approved to MB 229.3 or MB 229.5. Refer tcap for correct SAE grade.

Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.

Spark Plugs PLZTR5A – 13 (Gap 0.040 in [1.01 mm])Fuel Selection Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher.

MAINTA



Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or

Transfer Case MOPAR

NV146 Transfer Case Fluid or equivalentlubricants is NOT recommended.

Axle Differential (Front-Rear) MOPAR Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75Wequivalent.

Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acommended brake fluids.

Power Steering Reservoir This system requires the use of MOPAR Hydrauliing Fluid or equivalent, which meets Chrysler Mat10838.




MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . 354

Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

▫ Required Maintenance Inte



EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCEThe Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold typemust be done at the times or mileages specified to ensurethe continued proper functioning of the emissions control

system. These and all other maintenance services in-cluded in this manual, should be done to provide bestvehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operatingconditions, such as dusty areas and very short tripdriving.

Inspection and service should also be done anytime amalfunction is suspected.

NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis-sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may beperformed by any automotive repair establishment orindividual using any automotive part that has beencertified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULESThe oil change indicator system time to take your vehicle in for

On Electronic Vehicle Inforequipped vehicles “Oil Changplayed in the EVIC and a siindicating that an oil change is

Based on engine operation coindicator message will illuminatis required for your vehicle. Haas soon as possible, within the n

NOTE:• The oil change indicator mes

time since the last oil changeoil if it has been 6 months sieven if the oil change indilluminated.

8

M

AI

NTE

N

ANC

E

SC

HE

DU

LES

354 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES



• Change your engine oil more often if you drive yourvehicle off-road for an extended period of time.

• Under no circumstances should oil change intervalsexceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichevercomes first.

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicatormessage after completing the scheduled oil change. If thisscheduled oil change is performed by someone otherthan your authorized dealer the message can be reset byreferring to the steps described under ”Electronic VehicleInformation Center” in Section 4 of this manual.

At Each Stop for Fuel

• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after afully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil levelwhile the vehicle is on level ground will improve theaccuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only whenthe level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.

• Check the windshield wasrequired.

Once a Month

• Check tire pressure and loodamage.

• Inspect the battery and clean as required.

• Check the fluid levels of themaster cylinder, and poweneeded.

• Check all lights and other eloperation.

MAINT



At Each Oil Change

• Change the engine oil filter.

• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.

CAUTION!

Failure to perform the required maintenance itemsmay result in damage to the vehicle.

Required Maintenance IntervRefer to the Maintenance Schepages for the required maintena

8

M

AI

NTE

N

ANC

E

SC

HE

DU

LES




6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or6 Months Maintenance ServiceSchedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months MainteSchedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-roa

engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 m

12 months.

❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000

12 months.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cr

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if nece

Odometer Reading

Repair Order # Deale


MAINT



18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or18 Months MaintenanceService Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.




24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months MainteSchedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-roa

engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the CV joints.

❏ Inspect exhaust system.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cr

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if nece

Odometer Reading

Repair Order # Deale


8

M

AI

NTE

N

ANC

E

SC

HE

DU

LES





filter.❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.

❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.

❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles

equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.





filter.❏ If using your vehicle for any of the

following: Dusty or off-road conditions.

Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;

replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if

necessary.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends

and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all

parts for damage, wear, improper

looseness or end play; replace if necessary.




42,000 Mil42 MonthsService Sc❏ Change the

filter.

Odometer Read

Repair Order #

Signature Autho

MAINT



48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance ServiceSchedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the

engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.



❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.





filter.

Odometer Read

Repair Order #

Signature Autho

8

M

AI

NTE

N

ANC

E

SC

HE

DU

LES





❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.

❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.

❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the

following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.


❏ Inspect the accessory drive belt(s), replace if necessary.

❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles

(170 000 km).







filter.

Odometer Read

Repair Order #

Signature Autho

MAINT














filter.

Odometer Read

Repair Order #

Signature Autho

8

M

AI

NTE

N

ANC

E

SC

HE

DUL

ES









❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if

necessary.









filter.❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.

❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if

necessary. †


❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles

equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.




MAINT













102,000 M102 MonthService Sc❏ Change the

filter.❏ Replace th

❏ Flush and re

not done at

Odometer Read

Repair Order #

Signature Autho

8

M

AI

NTE

NA

NC

E

SC

HE

DUL

ES










necessary.









filter.




MAINT




❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.

❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.

❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.



❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.




❏ Inspect the accessory drive belt(s), replace if necessary.





filter.

Odometer Read

Repair Order #

Signature Autho

8

M

AI

NTE

NA

NC

E

SC

HE

DUL

ES










necessary.









filter.




MAINT














filter.❏ Replace the

❏ Drain the tr

❏ Adjust park

equipped w

Odometer Read

Repair Order #

Signature Autho

8

M

AI

NTE

NA

NC

E

SC

HE

DUL

ES




† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturerto the owner, but is not required to maintain emissionswarranty.

WARNING!• You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Do only service work for which youhave the knowledge and the right equipment. Ifyou have any doubt about your ability to performa service job, take your vehicle to a competentmechanic.

• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your

vehicle could result in a component malfunctionand effect vehicle handling and performance. Thiscould cause an accident

MAINT



IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTAN

CONTENTS

Suggestions For Obtaining Service For YourVehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 373

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 374

▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 374

▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

▫ Customer Assistance For TSpeech Impaired (TDD/TT

▫ Service Contract . . . . . . .

Warranty Information (U.S. V

MOPAR Parts . . . . . . . . .

Reporting Safety Defects . .

▫ In The 50 United States AnD.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . .

Publication Order Forms . .



Department Of Transportation Uniform TireQuality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . .

▫ Temperature Grades . . .

372 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE



SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FORYOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The AppointmentIf you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the

right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. Allwork to be performed may not be covered by thewarranty. Discuss additional charges with the servicemanager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’sservice history. This can often provide a clue to thecurrent problem.

Prepare A ListMake a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the

specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accidentor work done that is not on your maintenance log, let theservice advisor know.

Be Reasonable With RequestsIf you list a number of items and you must have yourvehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with

the service advisor and list the iAt many authorized dealers, yvehicle at a minimal daily chargis advisable to make these arra

for an appointment.IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCEThe manufacturer and its authointerested in your satisfaction. Wwith our products and services

Warranty service must be done We strongly recommend that y

authorized dealer. They know yare most concerned that you getservice. The manufacturer’s autfacilities, factory-trained technithe latest information to ensucorrectly and in a timely manne

IF YOU NEED CON



This is why you should always talk to an authorizeddealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-solved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the

general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-ship. They want to know if you need assistance.

• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve theconcern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customercenter.

Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-ter should include the following information:

• Owner’s name and address

• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

• Authorized dealership name

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle delivery date and mi

Chrysler Group LLC CustomP.O. Box 21–8004Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (800) 992-1997

Chrysler Canada Inc. CustomP.O. Box 1621Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6Phone: (800) 465–2001

In Mexico contact:Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Re

Sante Fe C.P. 05109Mexico, D. F.In Mexico City: 5081-7568Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-




Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or SpeechImpaired (TDD/TTY)To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, themanufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-

cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customercenter. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, whohas access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with themanufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that requireassistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with

a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service ContractYou may have purchased a service contract for a vehicleto help protect you from the high cost of unexpectedrepairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle LimitedWarranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only

the manufacturer’s service contmanufacturer’s service contracProvisions and an Owner Identiwithin three weeks of the vehi

have any questions about the manufacturer’s Service Contractline at 1-800-521-9922.

The manufacturer will not stcontract that is not the manufactis not responsible for any servicmanufacturer’s service contractvice contract that is not a manuf

and you require service after tVehicle Limited Warranty expcontract documents, and contthose documents.

IF YOU NEED CON



We appreciate that you have made a major investmentwhen you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealerhas also made a major investment in facilities, tools, andtraining to assure that you are absolutely delighted with

the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with theirsincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or relatedconcerns.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certainvehicle components contain, or emit, chemicalsknown to the State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certainproducts of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-cals known to the State of California to cause cancerand birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information DVD, for the terms and provisLLC warranties applicable to th

MOPAR PARTSMOPAR fluids, lubricants, paavailable from an authorized mended for your vehicle in ordeoperating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFEC

In the 50 United States and W

If you believe that your vehiclecause a crash or cause injuryimmediately inform the NationaAdministration (NHTSA) in amanufacturer.




If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your authorizeddealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto SafetyHotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can alsoobtain other information about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

In CanadaIf you believe that your vehicleshould contact the Customer Sediately. Canadian customers wh

defect to the Canadian goverTransport Canada, Motor Vehiand Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Roa3V9.

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMTo order the following manualswebsite or the phone numbers tercard, American Express, and

cepted. If you prefer mailing yfor an order form.

NOTE: A street address is rmanuals (no P.O. Boxes).

IF YOU NEED CON



• Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the in-formation that students and professional techniciansneed in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,

maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler GroupLLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of thevehicle, system, and/or components is written instraightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,and charts.

• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-

cal manuals make it easy for students and techniciansto find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-hicle systems and features. They show exactly how tofind and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all toolsand equipment.

• Owner’s Manuals

These Owner’s Manuals haveassistance of service and enacquaint you with specific C

hicles. Included are startingand maintenance procedurescapabilities and safety tips.

Call toll free at:

• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)

• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)

OrVisit us on the Worldwide Web

• www.techauthority.com




DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORMTIRE QUALITY GRADESThe following tire grading categories were established bythe National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. Thespecific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturerin each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires onyour vehicle.

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safetyrequirements in addition to these grades.

TreadwearThe Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based onthe wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified government test course. Forexample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires depends upon theactual conditions of their use, however, and may depart

significantly from the norm duehabits, service practices, and diteristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from higheand C. These grades represent thwet pavement, as measured undon specified government test concrete. A tire marked C may hmance.

WARNIN

The traction grade assigned straight-ahead braking tractiinclude acceleration, cornerpeak traction characteristics.

IF YOU NEED CON



Temperature GradesThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heatand its ability to dissipate heat, when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level of performance, which allpassenger car tires must meet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory testwheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNIN

The temperature grade for thia tire that is properly inflateExcessive speed, under-inflating, either separately or in cheat buildup and possible tir




INDEX



ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 159,251Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 325Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,52Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,51,56,72,159Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,52Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 47,50,52Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,159Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . .

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . Arming Theft System (Security Auto Down Power WindowsAutomatic Dimming Mirror . Automatic Door Locks . . . . . Automatic Headlights . . . . . Automatic Temperature Contro

Automatic Transmission . . . . Fluid Level Check . . . . . .

Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (PowAuxiliary Power Outlet . . . .

382 INDEX



Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 22Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,72Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,254Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 70Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344,345Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Calibration, Compass . . . . . . Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . Caps, Filler

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Steering . . . . . . . . . Radiator (Coolant Pressure)

Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon Monoxide Warning . . Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . Cargo Compartment . . . . . . .

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . Center High Mounted Stop LigChart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . .



Check Engine Light(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,60,65,67Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,65Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184,188,198Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Connector

UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Universal Consumer InterfacConsole, Overhead . . . . . . . . Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . Coolant Pressure Cap (RadiatorCooling System . . . . . . . . . .

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze)Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . Disposal of Used Coolant . Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . Points to Remember . . . . . Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . .

Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . Selection of Coolant (Antifree

Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer Assistance . . . . . .

384 INDEX



Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,230Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Dipsticks

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . 221

Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 137

Electronic Brake Control SystemAnti-Lock Brake System . . Brake Assist System . . . . . Electronic Roll Mitigation . Electronic Stability ProgramTraction Control System . .

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERMElectronic Speed Control (CruisElectronic Stability Program (ESElectronic Throttle Control WarElectronic Vehicle Information C(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency, In Case of

Freeing Vehicle When StuckHazard Warning Flasher . . Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . .

Emission Control System Maint



EngineAir Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,284Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280,350Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314,350

Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315,350Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . Enhanced Accident Response FEntry System, Illuminated . . Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . .

FiltersAir Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil Disposal . . . . .

Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . .

Flipper Glass, Liftgate . . . . . Flooded Engine Starting . . . .

386 INDEX



Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Fluid Level Checks

Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 351Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,166,347Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Front Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials Added . . . . . . . . Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . .

Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Garage Door Opener (HomeLinGas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . .

Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . Gauges

Coolant Temperature . . . . Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,23,280Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Hands-Free Phone (uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,345

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87,89High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

High Beam/Low Beam Select (DHitches

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . HomeLink (Garage Door Open

Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . .

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ignition Key Removal . . . . . Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . .

Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . Information Center, Vehicle . . Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . Instrument Panel and ControlsInstrument Panel Lens CleaningIntegrated Power Module (Fuse

388 INDEX



Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103,107Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Kicker Sound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tether for Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . Liftgate Window Wiper/WasheLight Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Headlights . . . . Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . Brake Assist Warning . . . .



Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,106Electronic Stability Program (ESP)Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,163,260Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 165Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,166,347Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345,346Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lights On Reminder . . . . . Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Indicator (Check

Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . Security Alarm (Theft Alarm)

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Engine Soon (MalfunSide Marker . . . . . . . . . . . SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPTraction Control . . . . . . . .

390 INDEX



Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,100,106,346,348Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Loading Vehicle

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,65

Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Maintenance Schedules . . . . . Malfunction Indicator Light (ChManual, Service . . . . . . . . . . Memory Feature (Memory SeatMemory Seat . . . . . . . . . . .

Memory Seats and Radio . . . Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Dimming . . . . . Electric Powered . . . . . . . Electric Remote . . . . . . . . Exterior Folding . . . . . . . .

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Modifications/Alterations, VehiMonitor, Tire Pressure SystemMopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . .



MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,50,54Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,50,52Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163,164

Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Recommendation . . . . . . . Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Onboard Diagnostic System . . Opener, Garage Door (HomeLinOperator Manual (Owner’s Man

Outside Rearview Mirrors . . Overhead Console . . . . . . . . Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . Owner’s Manual (Operator Man

Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . .

Park Sense System, Rear . . . . Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

392 INDEX



Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Phone, Hands-Free (uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 266Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

PowerDistribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 137Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,86Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248,249

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Pretensioners

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Programming Transmitters(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . .

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure

Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . Radio, Satellite (uconnect studRain Sensitive Wiper System . Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . Rear Heated Seats . . . . . . . . Rear Park Sense System . . . . Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . .

Rear Window Defroster . . . . Rear Window Features . . . . . Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . Recreational Towing . . . . . . . Reformulated Gasoline . . . . .



Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Remote Control

Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 223Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Run Flat Feature . . . . . . . . .

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . Safety Checks Outside VehicleSafety Defects, Reporting . . .

Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . Safety Information, Tire . . . . Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . Satellite Radio (uconnect studiSchedule, Maintenance . . . . . Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adjustable Upper Shoulder AAnd Pregnant Women . . . Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . .

394 INDEX



Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87,89Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,86

Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Security Against Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,159Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . Sentry Key Programming . . . Sentry Key Replacement . . . Service Assistance . . . . . . . . Service Contract . . . . . . . . . .

Service Engine Soon Light(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . Shift Lock Manual Override . Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Transmission . .

Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sirius Backseat TV™ (uconnectSmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . Sound System

Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,238

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

SteeringPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248,249Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound SystemControls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Storage, Behind the Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233,344Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . Supplemental Restraint System Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . System, Remote Starting . . . .

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telescoping Steering ColumnTemperature Control, AutomatiTemperature Gauge, Engine CoTether Anchor, Child RestraintTheft System Arming . . . . . . Theft System Disarming . . . .

Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . Tire and Loading Information PTire Identification Number (TINTire Markings . . . . . . . . . . .

396 INDEX



Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,270,379

Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 277Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Behind a Motor Home . . . Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Towing Vehicle Behind a MotorTraction Control . . . . . . . . . . Traction Control Light . . . . . Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . .

Cooling System Tips . . . . .

Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum Requirements . . Trailer and Tongue Weight

Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . .



Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,330Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Transmitter Battery Service(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . 128

Transmitter Programming(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 19Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106,157,346,348

UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208uconnect (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338,342Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 208Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . Vehicle Identification Number (Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Modifications/Alteratio

Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . Video Entertainment System™(Rear Seat Video System) . . . Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . Voice Recognition System (VR)

Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . .

Warnings and Cautions . . . . .Warranty Information . . . . . . Washers, Windshield . . . . . . Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . .

398 INDEX



Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,136Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,230Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield Wiper Blades . . . Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . Wiper Blade Replacement . . . Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . .

Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . .

2010 wk jeep grand cherokee srt8

Documents